ԳՈՐԾՔ ԱՌԱՔԵԼՈՑ 21:25
25 Բայց հաւատքը ընդունող հեթանոսներուն մասին՝ մենք գրեցինք, եզրակացնելով որ անոնք բնա՛ւ չպահեն այսպիսի բաներ, բայց միայն զգուշանան կուռքերու զոհուածէ, արիւնէ, խեղդուածէ ու պոռնկութենէ»:
Concerning
Strongs:
Lexicon:
περί
Greek:
περὶ
Transliteration:
peri
Context:
Next word
Gloss:
about
Morphhology:
Preposition
Grammar:
relating it to another person or thing
Source:
Identical in all sources
Tyndale
Word:
περί
Transliteration:
peri
Gloss:
about
Morphhology:
Greek Preposition
Definition:
περί, prep. with genitive, accusative (in cl. also with dative; cf. M, Pr., 105f.), with radical sense round about (as distinct from ἀμφί, on both sides). I. C. genitive, 1) of place, about (poët.). 2) Causal, about, on account of, concerning, in reference to: Mat.2:8, Mrk.1:44, Luk.4:38, Jhn.16:26, Act.28:21, al. mult; τὰ περί, with genitive, the things concerning one, one's state or case: Mrk.5:27, Act.1:3 28:15, Eph.6:22, al; at the beginning of a sentence, περί, regarding, as to, 1Co.7:1, al; in the sense on account of (Mat.26:28, 1Co.1:13, al.), often with ὑπέρ as variant (cf. M, Pr., 105). II. C. accusative, 1) of place, about, around: Mat.3:4, Mrk.1:6, Luk.13:8, Act.22:6, al; οἱ περί, with accusative of person(s), of one's associates, friends, etc, Mrk.4:10, Luk.22:49, Jhn.11:19, Act.13:13; οἱ περὶ τ. τοιαῦτα ἐργάται, Act.19:25; metaphorically, about, as to, concerning: 1Ti.1:19 6:4 2Ti.2:18 3:8, Tit.2:7; τὰ περὶ ἐμέ, Php.2:23; αἱ περὶ τ. λοιπὰ ἐπιθυμίαι, Mrk.4:19. 2) Of time, in a loose reckoning, about, near: Mat.20:3, 5 6, 9 27:46, Mrk.6:48, Act.10:3, 9 22:6. III. In composition: round about (περιβάλλω, περίκειμαι), beyond, over and above (περιποιέω, περιλείπω), to excess (περιεργάζομαι, περισσεύω). (AS)
Liddell-Scott-Jones
Word:
περί
Transliteration:
peri
Gloss:
about
Morphhology:
Greek Preposition
Definition:
περί, Thess, Delph. περ [Refs 5th c.BC+], also Aeolic dialect, see below [Refs 4th c.BC+] V; Elean παρ [Refs]: preposition with genitive, dative, and accusative:—round about, all round (properly different from ἀμφί, on both sides). (Cogn. with Sanskrit pári 'round about'.) A) WITH GENITIVE, A.I) of Place, sometimes in Poets, round about, around, τετάνυστο π. σπείους ἡμερίς [Refs 8th c.BC+], on both sides, see at {περιβαίνω} [Refs] A.I.2) about near, π. σοῦ πάντα γένοιτο ῥόδα [Refs] A.II) to denote the object about or for which one does something: A.II.1) with Verbs of fighting or contending, π. τινός for an object—from the notion of the thing's lying in the middle to be fought about, π. τῶνδε for these prizes, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; δόλους καὶ μῆτιν ὕφαινον, ὥς τε π. ψυχῆς since it was for my life, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; in Prose, τρέχειν π. ἑωυτοῦ, π. τῆς ψυχῆς, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; and without a Verb, π. γῆς ὅρων διαφοραί [Refs 8th c.BC+]; but ἐρίσσαι π. μύθων contend about speaking, i. e. who can speak best, [Refs 8th c.BC+] A.II.2) with words which denote care or anxiety, about, on account of, π. Τρώων. μερμηρίζειν [Refs 8th c.BC+]; κρίνειν, διαγιγνώσκειν π. τ, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; π. τ. ψηφίζεσθαι, διαψηφίζεσθαι, ψῆφον φέρειν, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; διανοεῖσθαι, σκοπεῖν π. τινός, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; π. πότου γοῦν ἐστί σο; so with you it is a question of drink? [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.II.3) with Verbs of hearing, knowing, speaking, etc, about, concerning, π. νόστου ἄκουσα [Refs 8th c.BC+]; π. τινὸς ἐρέειν, λέγειν, λόγον ποιήσασθαι, etc, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; π. τινὸς ἀγγεῖλαι, κηρῦξαι, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; π. τινὸς διελθεῖν, διεξελθεῖν, διηγεῖσθαι, [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.II.4) of impulse or motive rather than object, ἐμαρνάσθην ἔριδος πέρι fought for very enmity, [Refs 8th c.BC+] A.II.5) about, in regard to, μεμηνυμένος π. τινός [Refs 5th c.BC+]: in Prose frequently without a Verb, ἡ π. τῶν Μαντινικῶν πρᾶξις [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὰ π. τινός the circumstances of, [Refs]; οὕτω δὴ καὶ π. τῶν ἀρετῶν (i.e. ἔχει) [Refs 5th c.BC+]; π. τοῦ καταλειφθῆναι τὸν σῖτον as for reserving the corn, [Refs 3rd c.BC+] as to number, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; χρηστηρίων δὲ πέρι. [Refs] A.III) before, above, beyond, of superiority, chiefly in Epic dialect, π. πάντων ἔμμεναι ἄλλων [Refs 8th c.BC+] in understanding to be beyond them, [Refs 8th c.BC+] —In this sense π. is sometimes adverbial, and the genitive is absent, see below [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.IV) in [Refs 5th c.BC+] it is of much consequence, worth much, to us, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; π. πολλοῦ ποιεῖσθαί τινας to reckon them for, i.e. worth, much, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; π. πλείονος, π. πλείστου ποιεῖσθαι, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; π. ἐλάττονος ἡγούμενοι, π. οὐδενὸς ἡγήσασθαι, [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.V) Aeolic dialect περί and περ ={ὑπέρ, στροῦθοι περὶ γᾶς. δίννεντες πτέρα} [Refs 7th c.BC+]; περ κεφάλας probably in [Refs 7th c.BC+]; also Hellenistic, ὃ διέγραψε Προῖτος περί μου paid on my behalf, PCair. Zen.[Refs 3rd c.BC+] B) WITH DATIVE (in Attic dialect Prose mostly in signification [Refs 5th c.BC+] B.I) of Place, round about, around, of close-fitting dresses, armour, etc, ἔνδυνε π. στήθεσσι χιτῶνα [Refs 8th c.BC+]; οἱ στρεπτοὶ οἱ π. τῇ δέρῃ καὶ τὰ ψέλια π. ταῖς χερσί[Refs 8th c.BC+]; in other relations, π. δ᾽ ἔγχεϊ χεῖρα καμεῖται will grow weary by grasping the spear,[Refs]: rarely in Trag, π. βρέτει πλεχθείς [Refs 5th c.BC+] B.I.2) in Poets, also, around a weapon, i. e. spitted upon it, transfixed by it, π. δουρὶ πεπαρμένη [Refs 8th c.BC+] B.I.3) of a warrior standing over a dead comrade so as to defend him, ἀμφὶ δ᾽ ἄρ᾽ αὐτῷ βαῖν᾽, ὥς τις π. πόρτακι μήτηρ [Refs 5th c.BC+] B.II) of an object for or about which one struggles (compare above [Refs 8th c.BC+] B.II.2) with Verbs denoting care, anxiety, or the opposite (compare above [Refs 8th c.BC+] B.II.3) generally, of the cause or occasion, on account of, by reason of, ἀτύζεσθαι π. καπνῷ, variant for{ὑπὸ καπνοῦ} in [Refs 8th c.BC+] for fear, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; π. τιμᾷ in honour or praise, [Refs]; π. τάρβει, π. φόβῳ, [Refs 4th c.BC+] —but π. θυμῷ is falsa lectio in [Refs 5th c.BC+] C) WITH ACCUSATIVE, C.I) of Place, properly of the object round about which motion takes place, π. βόθρον ἐφοίτων came flocking round the pit, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ἐρύσας π. σῆμα [Refs 8th c.BC+]: also of extension round, ἑστάμεναι π. τοῖχον, π. βωμόν, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; π. τὴν κρήνην εὕδειν somewhere near it, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; π. λίθον πεσών upon it, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; π. αὑτὰ καταρρεῖν collapse upon themselves, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; πλεῦνες π. ἕνα many to one, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; π. τὸν ἄρξαντα. τὸ ἀδίκημά ἐστι is imputable to him who, [Refs 5th c.BC+] substantive only, ἡ π. Λέσβον ναυμαχία the sea-fight off Lesbos, [Refs 8th c.BC+] C.I.2) of persons who are about one, ἔχειν τινὰ π. αὑτόν [Refs 5th c.BC+]; especially οἱ π. τινά a person's attendants, connexions, associates, or colleagues, οἱ π. τὸν Πείσανδρον πρέσβεις [Refs 5th c.BC+]; οἱ π. Ἡράκλειτον his school, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; οἱ π. Ἀρχίαν πολέμαρχοι Archias and his colleagues, [Refs]; οἱ π. τινά so-and-so and his family, [Refs 2nd c.BC+]; later οἱ π. τινά, periphrastic for the person himself, οἱ π. Φαβρίκιον Fabricius, [Refs 1st c.AD+]; compare ἀμφί C. 1.3. C.I.3) of the object about which one is occupied or concerned, π. δόρπα πονεῖσθαι, π. δεῖπνον πένεσθαι, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; later mostly εἶναι π. τι, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; π. γυναῖκας γενέσθαι Vett.[Refs 5th c.BC+]; in periphrastic phrases, οἱ π. τὴν ποίησιν καὶ τοὺς λόγους ὄντες poets and orators, [Refs 5th c.BC+] ministers of the mysteries, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ὁ π. τὸν ἵππον the groom, [Refs 5th c.BC+] C.I.4) round or about a place, and so in, π. νῆσον ἀλώμενοι [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ἃν π. ψυχὰν γάθησεν in his heart, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; οἱ π. Φωκίδα τόποι [Refs 2nd c.BC+] C.I.5) about, in the case of, τὰ π. τὴν Αἴγυπτον γεγονότα, τὰ π. Μίλητον γενόμενα, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ποιέειν or πράττειν τι π. τινά, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; σπουδάζειν π. τινά promote his cause, [Refs 5th c.BC+]: without a Verb, αἱ π. τοὺς παῖδας συμφοραί [Refs 5th c.BC+]: generally, of all relations, about, concerning, in respect of, π. μὲν τοὺς ἰχθύας οὕτως ἔχει [Refs 5th c.BC+]; as to [Refs 5th c.BC+] adjective, ὄργανα ὅσα π. γεωργίαν, i.e. γεωργικά[Refs]; also in place of a genitive, οἱ π. Αυσίαν λόγοι the speeches of L, [Refs]; ἡ π. Φίλιππον τυραννίς the despotism of P, [Refs 5th c.BC+]: in Prose, to denote circumstances connected with any person or thing, τὰ π. Κῦρον, τὰ π. Ἑλένην, τὰ π. Βάττον, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὰ π. τὸν Ἄθων the works at Mount Athos, [Refs]; τὰ π. τὰς ναῦς naval affairs, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὰ π. τὴν ναυμαχίαν (variant for{τῆς ναυμαχίας}) the events of, [Refs 5th c.BC+] C.II) of Time, π. λύχνων ἁφάς about the time of lamp-lighting, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; π. μέσας νύκτας about midnight, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; π. ἡλίου δυσμάς[Refs 5th c.BC+] C.II.2) of round numbers, π. ἑβδομήκοντα about seventy, [Refs 5th c.BC+] D) Position: π. may follow its substantive, when it suffers anastrophe, ἄστυ πέρι [Refs 8th c.BC+] only once uses it before its genitive, [Refs 5th c.BC+] E) περί absolutely, as adverb, around, about, also, near, by, frequently in [Refs 8th c.BC+]round about, [Refs 3rd c.BC+] E.II) before or above others [Refs 4th c.BC+], exceedingly, only Epic dialect, in which case it commonly suffers anastrophe, Τυδεΐδη, πέρι μέν σε τίον Δαναοί [Refs 8th c.BC+]; σε χρὴ πέρι μὲν φάσθαι ἔπος ἠδ᾽ ἐπακοῦσαι[Refs 8th c.BC+] E.II.2) π. does not suffer anastrophe in the Epic dialect phrase π. κῆρι right heartily, π. κῆρι φίλησε [Refs 8th c.BC+]; π. κῆρι τιέσκετο[Refs 8th c.BC+] E.II.3) for περὶ πρό, see at {περιπρό}. E.II.4) περὶ κάτω bottom upwards, δῖνος π. κάτω τετραμμένος [Refs 5th c.BC+] F) IN COMPOSITION (joined with other words), all its chief senses recur, especially F.I) extension in all directions as from a centre, all round, as in περιβάλλω, περιβλέπω, περιέχω. F.II) completion of an orbit and return to the same point, about, as in περιάγω, περιβαίνω, περίειμι (εἶμι ibo), περιέρχομαι, περιστρέφω. F.III) a going over or beyond, above, before, as in περιβαίνω III, περιβάλλω see, περιγίγνομαι, περιεργάζομαι, περιτοξεύω. F.IV) generally, a strengthening of the simple notion, beyond measure, very, exceedingly, as in περικαλλής, περίκηλος, περιδείδω, like Latin per. F.V) the notion of double-ness which belongs to ἀμφί is found in only one poetic compound, περιδέξιος (which see). G) PROSODY: περί never suffers elision in [Refs 8th c.BC+] near the end; περ᾽ ἰγνύῃσι [Refs 5th c.BC+]; in Comedy texts and codices of Prose writers only in participle of περίειμι (εἶμι ibo) (which see):—π. stands before a word beginning with a vowel in Comedy texts, περὶ Ἀθηνῶν, περὶ ἐμοῦ, [Refs 5th c.BC+] {περιαγαπάζομαι}:—Aeolic dialect περρ for the sake of meter, see [Refs 4th c.BC+]
Strongs
Word:
περί
Transliteration:
perí
Pronounciation:
per-ee'
Language:
Greek
Morphhology:
Preposition
Definition:
properly, through (all over), i.e. around; figuratively with respect to; used in various applications, of place, cause or time (with the genitive case denoting the subject or occasion or superlative point; with the accusative case the locality, circuit, matter, circumstance or general period); (there-)about, above, against, at, on behalf of, X and his company, which concern, (as) concerning, for, X how it will go with, ((there-, where-)) of, on, over, pertaining (to), for sake, X (e-)state, (as) touching, (where-)by (in), with; from the base of g4008 (πέραν)
now
Strongs:
Lexicon:
δέ
Greek:
δὲ
Transliteration:
de
Context:
Next word
Gloss:
but/and
Morphhology:
Conjunction
Source:
Identical in all sources
Tyndale
Word:
δέ
Transliteration:
de
Gloss:
then
Morphhology:
Greek Conjunction
Definition:
δέ (before vowels δ᾽; on the general neglect of the elision in NT, see WH, App., 146; Tdf, Pr., 96), post-positive conjunctive particle; 1) copulative, but, in the next place, and, now (Abbott, JG, 104): Mat.1:2 ff, 2Co.6:15, 16, 2Pe.1:5-7; in repetition for emphasis, Rom.3:21, 22, 9:30, 1Co.2:6, Gal.2:2, Php.2:8; in transition to something new, Mat.1:18, 2:19, Luk.13:1, Jhn.7:14, Act.6:1, Rom.8:28, 1Co.7:1 8:1, al; in explanatory parenthesis or addition, Jhn.3:19, Rom.5:8, 1Co.1:12, Eph.2:4, 5:32, al; ὡς δέ, Jhn.2:9; καὶ. δέ, but also, Mat.10:18, Luk.1:76, Jhn.6:51, Rom.11:23, al; καὶ ἐὰν δέ, yea even if, Jhn.8:16. 2) Adversative, but, on the other hand, prop, answering to a foregoing μέν (which see), and distinguishing a word or clause from one preceding (in NT most frequently without μέν; Bl, §77, 12): ἐὰν δέ, Mat.6:14, 23, al; ἐγὼ (σὺ, etc.) δέ, Mat.5:22, 6:6, Mrk.8:29, al; ὁ δέ, αὐτὸς δέ, Mrk.1:45, Luk.4:40, al; after a negation, Mat.6:19, 20, Rom.3:4, 1Th.5:21, al. (AS)
Liddell-Scott-Jones
Word:
δέ
Transliteration:
de
Gloss:
then
Morphhology:
Greek Conjunction
Definition:
δέ, but: adversative and copulative Particle, I) answering to μέν (which see), τὴν νῦν μὲν Βοιωτίαν, πρότερον δὲ Καδμηίδα γῆν καλουμένην [Refs 5th c.BC+] II) without preceding μέν, II.1) adversative, expressing distinct opposition, αἰεί τοι τὰ κάκ᾽ ἐστὶ φίλα. μαντεύεσθαι, ἐσθλὸν δ᾽ οὔτε τί πω εἶπας[Refs 5th c.BC+]; so in Prose, οὐκ ἐπὶ κακῷ, ἐλευθερώσει δέ. [Refs 5th c.BC+] II.2) copulative, II.2.a) in explanatory clauses, ξυνέβησαν. τὰ μακρὰ τείχη ἑλεῖν (ἦν δὲ σταδίων μάλιστα ὀκτώ) [Refs 8th c.BC+]: when a substantive is followed by words in apposition, Ἀρισταγόρῃ τῷ Μιλησίῳ, δούλῳ δὲ ἡμετέρῳ [Refs 5th c.BC+]; so in answers, διπλᾶ λέγειν. —Answ. διπλᾶδ᾽ ὁρᾶν [Refs] II.2.b) in enumerations or transitions, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; with repetition of a word in different relations, ὣς Ἀχιλεὺς θάμβησεν, θάμβησαν δὲ καὶ ἄλλοι [Refs 8th c.BC+]; in rhetorical outbursts, οὐκ ἂν εὐθέως εἴποιεν· τὸν δὲ βάσκανον, τὸν δὲ ὄλεθρον, τοῦτον δὲ ὑβρίζειν,—ἀναπνεῖν δέ. [Refs 4th c.BC+]; in a climax, πᾶν γύναιον καὶ παιδίον καὶ θηρίον δέ nay even beast, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; in the combination καὶ δέ [Refs 8th c.BC+] II.2.c) answering to τε (which see), ἃ τῶν τε ἀποβαινόντων ἕνεκα ἄξια κεκτῆσθαι, πολὺ δὲ μᾶλλον αὐτὰ αὑτῶν [Refs 5th c.BC+] II.3) implying causal connexion, less direct than γάρ, [Refs 8th c.BC+] II.4) in questions, with implied opposition, ἑόρακας δ᾽, ἔφη, τὴν γυναῖκ; [Refs 5th c.BC+] II.4.b) τί δ; what then? to mark a transition in dialogue; see at {τίς}. II) in apodosi: II.1) after hypothetical clauses, εἰ δέ κε μὴ δώωσιν, ἐγὼ δέ κεν αὐτὸς ἕλωμαι if they will not give it, then I, [Refs 8th c.BC+] II.1.b) after temporal or relative clauses, with ἐπεί, ἕως, etc, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; with demonstrative Pronouns or adverbs answering to a preceding relative, οἵηπερ φύλλων γενεή, τοίη δὲ καὶ ἀνδρῶν [Refs 8th c.BC+]: sometimes after a participle, οἰόμενοι. τιμῆς τεύξεσθαι, ἀντὶ δὲ τούτων οὐδ᾽ ὅμοιοι. ἐσόμεθα [Refs 5th c.BC+] II.2) to resume after an interruption or parenthesis, χρόνου δὲ ἐπιγινομένου καὶ κατεστραμμένων σχεδὸν πάντων,—κατεστραμμένων δὲ τούτων. [Refs 5th c.BC+]; with an anacoluthon, ἡ δὲ ψυχὴ ἄρα,—οἷ ἂν θεὸς θέλῃ. τῇ ἐμῇ ψυχῇ ἰτέον, αὕτη δὲ δή. [Refs 5th c.BC+] II.3) to begin a story, ἦμος δ᾽ ἠέλιος. well, when the sun, [Refs 8th c.BC+] II.4) to introduce a proof, τεκμήριον δέ, σημεῖον δέ, (see entry). B) POSITION of δέ. It usually stands second: hence frequently between Article and substantive or preposition and case; but also after substantive, or words forming a connected notion, hence it may stand third, γυναῖκα πιστὴν δ᾽ ἐν δόμοις εὕροι [Refs 5th c.BC+]; so in Prose after a negative, οὐχ ὑπ᾽ ἐραστοῦ δέ, to avoid confusion between οὐ δέ and οὐδέ, [Refs 5th c.BC+]
Strongs
Word:
δέ
Transliteration:
dé
Pronounciation:
deh
Language:
Greek
Morphhology:
Conjunction
Definition:
but, and, etc.; also, and, but, moreover, now (often unexpressed in English); a primary particle (adversative or continuative)
those
Strongs:
Lexicon:
ὁ
Greek:
τῶν
Transliteration:
tōn
Context:
Next word
Gloss:
the/this/who
Morphhology:
Definite article Genitive Plural Neuter
Grammar:
SPECIFIC neuter people or things that something belongs to
Source:
Identical in all sources
Additional:
[those] which
Tyndale
Word:
ὁ
Transliteration:
ho
Gloss:
the/this/who
Morphhology:
Greek Article
Definition:
ὁ, ἡ, τό, the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article. I. As demonstr. pron. 1) As frequently in Hom, absol, he (she, it), his (etc.): Act.17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus). 2) Distributive, ὁ μὲν. ὁ δέ, the one. the other: 1Co.7:7, Gal.4:22; pl, Act.14:4, 17:32, Php.1:16, al; οἱ μὲν. ἄλλοι δέ, Mat.16:14, Jhn.7:12; οἱ μεν̀. ὁδέ, Heb.7:21, 23. 3) In narration (without ὁ μὲν preceding), ὁ δέ, but he: Mat.2:14, Mrk.1:45, Luk.8:21, Jhn.9:38, al. mult. II. As prepositive article, the, prefixed, 1) to nouns unmodified: ὁ θεός, τὸ φῶς, etc; to abstract nouns, ἡ σοφία, etc, to pl. nouns which indicate a class, οἱ ἀλώπεκες, foxes, Mat.8:20, al; to an individual as representing a class, ὁ ἐργάτης, Luk.10:7; with nom. = voc. in addresses, Mat.11:26, Jhn.19:3, Jas.5:1, al; to things which pertain to one, ἡ χεῖρ, his hand, Mrk.3:1; to names of persons well known or already mentioned; usually to names of countries (originally adjectives), ἡ Ἰουδαία, etc. 2) To modified nouns: with of person(s) pron. genitive, μοῦ, σοῦ, etc; with poss. pron, ἐμός, σός, etc; with adj. between the art. and the noun, ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθρωπος, Mat.12:35; the noun foll, by adj, both with art, ὁ ποιμὴν ὁ καλός, Jhn.10:11 (on ὁ ὄχλος πολύς, Jhn.12:9, see M, Pr., 84); before adjectival phrases, ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Rom.9:11. 3) To Other parts of speech used as substantives; (a) neuter adjectives: τ. ἀγαθόν, etc; (b) cardinal numerals: ὁ εἶς, οἷ δύο, etc; (with) participles: ὁ βαπτίζων (= ὁ Βαπτιστής, Mat.14:2), Mrk.6:14; πᾶς ὁ, with ptcp, every one who, etc; (d) adverbs: τὸ πέραν, τὰ νῦν, ὁ ἔσω ἄνθρωπος; (e) infinitives: nom, τὸ θέλειν, Rom.7:18, al; genitive, τοῦ, after adjectives, ἄξιον τοῦ πορεύεσθαι, 1Co.16:4; verbs, ἐλαχεν τοῦ θυμιᾶσαι, Luk.1:9; and frequently in a final sense, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρειν, Mat.13:3 (on the artic. inf, see Bl, §71). 4) In the neut. to sentences, phrases or single words treated as a quotation: τὸ Ἐι δύνῃ, Mrk.9:23; τὸ ἔτι ἅπαξ, Heb.12:27; τὸ ἀνέβη, Eph.4:9, al. 5) To prepositional phrases: οἱ ἀπὸ Ἰταλίας, Heb.13:24; οἱ ἐκ νόμου, Rom.4:14; neut. accusative absol, in adverbial phrases, τὸ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, daily, Luk.11:3; τὸ κατὰ σάρκα, as regards the flesh, Rom.9:5. 6) To nouns in the genitive, denoting kinship, association, etc: ὁ τοῦ, the son of (unless context indicates a different relationship), Mat.10:2, al; τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ, the things that pertain to God, Mat.16:23; τὰ τῆς εἰρήνης, Rom.14:19 (cf. M, Pr., 81ff; Bl, §§46, 47). (AS)
Liddell-Scott-Jones
Word:
ὁ
Transliteration:
ho
Gloss:
the/this/who
Morphhology:
Greek Article
Definition:
ὁ, ἡ, τό, is, when thus written, A) demonstrative Pronoun. B ) in Attic dialect, definite or prepositive Article. C ) in Epic dialect, the so-called postpositive Article, = relative Pronoun, ὅς, ἥ, ὅ.—The nominative masculine and feminine singular and plural, ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ, have no accent in codices and most printed books, except when used as the relative; but ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ differ only in writing from ὃ, ἣ, οἳ, α; the nominative forms of the article are said by Hdn.Gr.1.474 to be oxytone, and by [Refs 2nd c.AD+] in Aeolic dialect accusative to [Refs 8th c.BC+] genitive and dative dual τοῖιν [Refs 8th c.BC+]— In Doric dialect and all other dialects except Attic dialect and Ionic dialect the feminine forms preserve the old ᾱ instead of changing it to η, hence Doric dialect etc. ἁ, τάν, τᾶ; the genitive plural τάων contracts in many dialects to τᾶ; the genitive singular is in many places τῶ, accusative plural τώς, but Cretan dialect, etc, τόνς [Refs]; in Lesbian Aeolic dialect the accusative plural forms are τοὶς, ταὶς, [Refs]; dative plural τοῖς, ταῖς (or τοὶς, ταὶς, see above), [Refs]; ταῖσι as demonstrative, [Refs 7th c.BC+] Poets also used the Ionic dialect and _Epic dialect_ forms τοῖσι, ταῖσ; and in Trag. we find τοὶ μέν, τοὶ δέ, for οἱ μέν, οἱ δέ, not only in Lyric poetry, as [Refs 5th c.BC+]; but even in a trimeter, [Refs 5th c.BC+] {ὅ}; τὼ πόλεε Foed. cited in [Refs 5th c.BC+]; in [Refs 4th c.AD+] functions as genitive dual feminine, μεσακόθεν τοῖς κράναιυν [Refs 4th c.BC+] —in Elean and _Boeotian dialect_ ὁ, ἡ (ἁ), τό, with the addition of -ί, ={ὅδε}, ἥδε, τόδε, _nominative_ _plural_ _masculine_ τυΐ the following men, [Refs 3rd c.BC+] cf. Sanskrit demonstrative pronoun sa, sā, Gothic sa, sō, ONorse sá, sú, Old Latin accusative sum, sam (Enn.): —with τό [from *τόδ] cf. Sanskrit tat (tad), Latin is-tud, Gothic pata: —with τοί cf. Sanskrit te, Lithuanian tĩe, O[Refs 5th c.BC+] pá, etc:—with τάων cf. Sanskrit tāsām, Latin is-tarum:— the origin of the relative ὅς, ἥ, ὅ (which see) is different.) A) ὁ, ἡ, τό, DEMONSTR. PRONOUN, that, the oldest and in [Refs 8th c.BC+] the commonest sense: frequently also in [Refs 5th c.BC+], and sometimes in Trag. (mostly in Lyric poetry, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; τῶν γάρ, τῆς γάρ, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; seldom in Attic dialect Prose, except in special phrases, see infr. VI, VII): A.I) joined with a substantive, to call attention to it, ὁ Τυδεΐδης he—Tydeus' famous son, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; τὸν Χρύσην that venerable man Chryses, I.II: and so with appellative, Νέστωρ ὁ γέρων N.—thataged man, [Refs]; αἰετοῦ. τοῦ θηρητῆρος the eagle, that which is called hunter, [Refs]; also to define and give emphasis, τιμῆς τῆς Πριάμου for honour, namely that of Priam, [Refs]; οἴχετ᾽ ἀνὴρ ὤριστος a man is gone, and he the best, [Refs]:—different from this are cases [Refs 8th c.BC+] if he would help the Trojans, but drive those back to the ships—I mean the Achaeans, where Ἀχ. is only added to explain τούς, compare [Refs] A.II) frequently without a substantive, he, she, it, ὁ γὰρ ἦλθε [Refs 8th c.BC+] A.III) placed after its Noun, before the Relat. Prons, ἐφάμην σὲ περὶ φρένας ἔμμεναι ἄλλων, τῶν ὅσσοι Λυκίην ναιετάουσι far above the rest, above those to wit who, etc, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; οἷ᾽ οὔ πώ τιν᾽ ἀκούομεν οὐδὲ παλαιῶν, τάων αἳ πάρος ἦσαν. Ἀχαιαί such as we have not heard tell of yet even among the women of old, those women to wit who, [Refs 8th c.BC+] —for the _Attic dialect_ usage see below A.IV) before a Possessive pronoun its demonstrative force is sometimes very manifest, φθίσει σε τὸ σὸν μένος that spirit of thine, [Refs 8th c.BC+] A.V) for cases in which the Homeric usage approaches most nearly to the Attic, see below [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.VI) ὁ μέν, ὁ δέ. without a substantive, in all cases, genders, and numbers, [Refs 8th c.BC+] properly refers to the former, ὁ δέ to the latter; more rarely ὁ μέν the latter, ὁ δέ the former, [Refs 5th c.BC+]: sometimes in Partition, the one, the other, etc.—The Noun with it is regularly in genitive plural, being divided by the ὁ μέν, ὁ δέ, into parts, ἠΐθεοι καὶ παρθένοι, τῶν δ᾽ αἱ μὲν λεπτὰς ὀθόνας ἔχον, οἱ δὲ χιτῶνας εἵατο [Refs 8th c.BC+]: but frequently the Noun is in the same case, by a kind of apposition, ἴδον υἷε Δάρητος, τὸν μὲν ἀλευάμενον τὸν δὲ κτάμενον [Refs 8th c.BC+]: so in Trag. and Attic dialect, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; if the Noun be collective, it is in the genitive singular, ὁ μὲν πεπραμένος ἦν τοῦ σίτου, ὁ δὲ ἔνδον ἀποκείμενος [Refs 8th c.BC+] A.VI.2) when a negative accompanies ὁ δέ, it follows δέ, e.g. τὰς γοῦν Ἀθήνας οἶδα τὸν δὲ χῶρον οὔ [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.VI.3) ὁ μέν τις, ὁ δέ τις. is used in Prose, when the Noun to which ὁ refers is left indefinite, ἔλεγον ὁ μέν τις τὴν σοφίαν, ὁ δὲ τὴν καρτερίαν, ὁ δέ τις καὶ τὸ κάλλος [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.VI.4) on τὸ μέν, τὸ δέ, or τὰ μέν, τὰ δέ, [Refs] A.VI.5) ὁ μέν is frequently used without a corresponding ὁ δέ, οἱ μὲν ἄρ᾽ ἐσκίδναντο, Μυρμιδόνας δ᾽ οὐκ εἴα ἀποσκίδνασθαι [Refs 8th c.BC+]; by ἄλλος δέ, [Refs 8th c.BC+] A.VI.6) ὁ δέ following μέν sometimes refers to the subject of the preceding clause, τοῦ μὲν ἅμαρθ᾽, ὁ δὲ Λεῦκον. βεβλήκει [Refs 8th c.BC+]: rare in Attic dialect Prose, ἐπεψήφιζεν αὐτὸς ἔφορος ὤν· ὁ δὲ οὐκ ἔφη διαγιγνώσκειν τὴν βοήν [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.VI.7) ὁ δέ is frequently used simply in continuing a narrative, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; also used by [Refs 8th c.BC+] A.VI.8) the opposition may be expressed otherwise than by μέν and δέ, οὔθ᾽ ὁ. οὔθ᾽ ὁ [Refs 8th c.BC+] A.VII) the following usages prevailed in Attic dialect Prose, A.VII.1) in dialogue, after καί, it was usual to say in nominative singular masculine καὶ ὅ; in the other cases the usual forms of the Article were used (see. ὅς [Refs 4th c.BC+] II.I and cf. Sanskrit sas, alternatative form of sa); so, in accusative, καὶ τὸν εἰπεῖν [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.VII.2) ὁ καὶ ὁ such and such, τῇ καὶ τῇ ἀτιμίᾳ [Refs 5th c.BC+]: but mostly in accusative, καί μοι κάλει τὸν καὶ τόν [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἀνάγκη ἄρα τὸ καὶ τό it must then be so and so, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; but τὰ καὶ τά now one thing, now another, of good and bad, τὸν δ᾽ ἀγαθὸν τολμᾶν χρὴ τά τε καὶ τὰ φέρειν [Refs 6th c.BC+]; so πάντα τοῦ μετρίου μεταβαλλόμενα ἐπὶ τὰ καὶ ἐπὶ τά, of excess and defect, [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.VIII) absolutely usages of single cases, A.VIII.1) feminine dative τῇ, of Place, there, on that spot, here, this way, that way, [Refs 8th c.BC+], etc: also in Prose, τὸ μὲν τῇ, τὸ δὲ τῇ [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.VIII.1.b) with a notion of motion towards, that way, in that direction, [Refs 8th c.BC+] —only poetry A.VIII.1.c) of Manner, τῇ περ τελευτήσεσθαι ἔμελλεν in this way, thus, [Refs 8th c.BC+] A.VIII.1.d) repeated, τῇ μέν, τῇ δέ, in one way, in another, or partly, partly, [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.VIII.1.e) relative, where, by which way, only Epic dialect, as [Refs 8th c.BC+] A.VIII.2) neuter dative τῷ, therefore, on this account, frequently in [Refs 8th c.BC+] A.VIII.2.b) thus, so, [Refs 8th c.BC+] precedes, be translated, then, if this be so, on this condition, [Refs 8th c.BC+] A.VIII.3) neuter accusative τό, wherefore, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; also τὸ δέ absolutely, but the fact is, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; even when the τό refers to what precedes, the contrast may lie not in the thing referred to, but in another part of the sentence (compare above[Refs 5th c.BC+]; φασὶ δέ τινες αὐτὸν καὶ τῶν ἑπτὰ σοφῶν γεγονέναι· τὸ δὲ οὐκ ἦν but he was not, [Refs 1st c.BC+] A.VIII.4) τὸ μέν, τὸ δέ, partly, partly, or on the one hand, on the other, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; more frequently τὰ μέν, τὰ δέ, [Refs 5th c.BC+] in the first clause, τὸ δέ τι [Refs] several times. and finally, [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.VIII.5) of Time, sometimes that time, sometimes this (present) time, συνμαχία κ᾽ ἔα ἑκατὸν ϝέτεα, ἄρχοι δέ κα τοΐ (where it is possible, but not necessary, to supply ϝέτος) [Refs 6th c.BC+] from that time, [Refs 8th c.BC+] A.VIII.5.b) πρὸ τοῦ, sometimes written προτοῦ, before this, aforetime, [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.VIII.5.c) in Thess. Prose, ὑππρὸ τᾶς yesterday, τὰ ψαφίσματα τό τε ὑππρὸ τᾶς γενόμενον καὶ τὸ τᾶμον the decree which was passed yesterday (literal before this [day]), and to-day's, [Refs 3rd c.BC+] A.VIII.6) ἐν τοῖς is frequently used in Prose with Superlatives, ἐν τοῖσι θειότατον a most marvellous thing, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἐν τοῖς πρῶτοι the very first, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἐν τοῖσι πρῶτος (πρώτοις codices) [Refs 5th c.BC+]; [Ζεὺς] Ἔρωτά τε καὶ Ἀνάγκην ἐν τοῖς πρῶτα ἐγέννησεν first of all, [Refs 2nd c.AD+] the greatest number of ships, [Refs 5th c.BC+]: also with adverbs, ἐν τοῖς μάλιστα [Refs 5th c.BC+]: in late Prose, also with Positives, ἐν τοῖς παράδοξον [Refs 1st c.BC+] B) ὁ, ἡ, τό, THE DEFINITE ARTICLE, the, to specify individuals: rare in this signification in the earliest Gr, becoming commoner later. In [Refs 8th c.BC+] the demonstrative force can generally be traced, [Refs 4th c.BC+] I, but the definite Article must be recognized in places [Refs 8th c.BC+]: also when joined to an adjective to make it a substantive, αἰὲν ἀποκτείνων τὸν ὀπίστατον the hindmost man, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; also in τῶν ἄλλων [Refs]; also τὸ τρίτον[Refs]; τὸ μὲν ἄλλο for the rest,[Refs]—The true Article, however, is first fully established in 5th C Attic dialect, whilst the demonstrative usage disappears, except in a few cases, V. [Refs 4th c.BC+] —Chief usages, especially in _Attic dialect_ B.I) not only with common Appellats, adjectives, and Parts, to specify them as present to sense or mind, but also frequently where we use the Possessive pronoun, τὸ κέαρ ηὐφράνθην [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὴν κεφαλὴν κατεάγην my head was broken, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τοὺς φίλους ποιούμεθα we make our friends, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὰς πόλεις ἔκτιζον they began founding their cities, [Refs 5th c.BC+] B.I.b) omitted with proper nounsand frequently with Appellats. which require no specification, as θεός, βασιλεύς, see at {θεός} [Refs] III; ἐμ πόλει in the Acropolis, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; compare Θράσυλος in [Refs]; or when the person spoken of is to be specially distinguished, Ζεύς, ὅστις ὁ Ζεύς whoever this Zeus is, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; and therefore properly omitted when a special designation follows, as Σωκράτης ὁ φιλόσοφος: seldom in Trag. with proper nouns, save to give peculiar emphasis, like Latin ille, ὁ Λάϊος, ὁ Φοῖβος, [Refs 5th c.BC+] B.I.c) Aristotle says Σωκράτης meaning the historical Socrates, as in [Refs] when he means the Platonic Socrates, as [Refs] B.I.d) for Σαῦλος ὁ καὶ Παῦλος, etc, see at {καί} [Refs 5th c.BC+] B.I.2) in a generic sense, where the individual is treated as a type, οἷς ὁ γέρων μετέῃσιν. λεύσσει [Refs 8th c.BC+] B.I.2.b) frequently with abstract Nouns, ἥ τε ἐλπὶς καὶ ὁ ἔρως [Refs 5th c.BC+] B.I.3) of outstanding members of a class, ὁ γεωγράφος, ὁ κωμικός, ὁ ποιητής, ὁ τεχνικός, see at {γεωγράφος}, κωμικός, ποιητής, τεχνικός. B.I.4) with infinitives, which thereby become Substantives, τὸ εἴργειν prevention, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὸ φρονεῖν good sense, [Refs 5th c.BC+]infinitive, τὸ θεοὺς εἶναι the existence of gods, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὸ μηδένα εἶναι ὄλβιον the fact or statement that no one is happy, [Refs 5th c.BC+] B.I.5) in neuter before any word or expression which itself is made the object of thought, τὸ ἄνθρωπος the word or notion man; τὸ λέγω the word λέγ; τὸ μηδὲν ἄγαν the sentiment 'ne quid nimis', [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὸ τῇ αὐτῇ the phrase τῇ αὐτῇ, [Refs 5th c.BC+] the opinion about the question 'who ought to rule', [Refs]; τὸ ἐὰν μένητε παρ᾽ ἐμοί, ἀποδώσω the phrase 'I will give back, if. ', [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὸ ὀλίγοι the term few, [Refs 4th c.BC+] B.I.6) before relative clauses, when the Article serves to combine the whole relative clause into one notion, τῇ ᾗ φὴς σὺ σκληρότητι the harshness you speak of, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὸν ἥμερον καρπόν, καὶ τὸν ὅσος ξύλινος (i.e. καὶ τὸν καρπὸν ὅσος ἂν ᾖ ξύλινος) [Refs 5th c.BC+] B.I.7) before Prons, B.I.7.a) before the person Prons, giving them greater emphasis, but only in accusative, τὸν ἐμέ [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὸν. σὲ καὶ ἐμέ[Refs] B.I.7.b) before the interrogative pronoun (both τίς and ποῖος), referring to something before, which needs to be more distinctly specified, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τῆς ποίας μερίδο; [Refs 4th c.BC+]; τοῖς ποίοις; [Refs 4th c.BC+] B.I.7.c) with τοιοῦτος, τοιόσδε, τηλικοῦτος, etc, the Article either makes the pronoun into a substantive, ὁ τοιοῦτος that sort of person, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; or subjoins it to a substantive which already has an Article, τὴν ἀπολογίαν τὴν τοιαύτην [Refs 4th c.BC+] B.I.8) before ἅπας, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; also τὸν ἕνα, τὸν ἕνα τοῦτον, [Refs 4th c.BC+] see entry; and on οἱ ἄλλοι, οἱ πολλοί, etc, see at {ἄλλος} [Refs] B.I.9) the Article with the comparative is rare, if ἤ follows, [Refs 5th c.BC+] B.II) elliptic expressions: B.II.1) before the genitive of a proper name, to express descent, son or daughter, Θουκυδίδης ὁ Ὀλόρου (i.e. υἱός) [Refs 5th c.BC+]; Ἑλένη ἡ τοῦ Διός (i.e. θυγάτηρ) [Refs 5th c.BC+]: also to denote other relationships, e.g. brother, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἡ Σμικυθίωνος Μελιστίχη M.the wife of [Refs 5th c.BC+]; Κλέαρχος καὶ οἱ ἐκείνου Cl. and his men, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ὁ τοῦ Ἀντιγένεος the slave of [Refs 5th c.BC+] B.II.2) generally, before a genitive it indicates a wider relation, as τὸ τῶν νεῶν, τὸ τῶν Ἑρμῶν, the matter of the ships, the affair of the Hermae, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὰ τοῦ Ἀρριβαίου πράσσειν to promote the interests of Arrhibaeus, [Refs]; τὸ τῆς τύχης,=ἡ τύχη, [Refs]; τὰ τῆς τύχης accidents, chance events, [Refs]; τὰ γὰρ φθιτῶν τοῖς ὁρῶσι κόσμος performance of the rites due to the dead befits the living, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὰ τῶν θεῶν that which is destined by the gods, [Refs 5th c.BC+] what regards me or thee, my or thy business or interests, [Refs 5th c.BC+]: and with genitive of [Refs 5th c.BC+] is frequently also, a man's word or saying, as τὸ τοῦ Σόλωνος [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὸ τοῦ Ὁμήρου as Homer says, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; also τά τινος so-and-so's house, [NT+5th c.BC+] B.II.3) very frequently with cases governed by Preps. αἱ ἐκ τῆς Ζακύνθου νῆες the ships from Zacynthus, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; also τὰ ἐπὶ Θρᾴκης the Thrace-ward district, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὰ ἀπὸ τοῦ καταστρώματος matters on deck, [Refs]; τὰ ἀπ᾽ Ἀλκιβιάδου the proposals of Alcibiades, [Refs]; τὰ ἀπὸ τῆς τύχης the incidents of fortune, [Refs] B.II.4) on μὰ τόν, μὰ τήν, etc, see at {μά} IV. B.II.5) in elliptical phrases, ἐπορευόμην τὴν ἔξω τείχους (i.e. ὁδόν) [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἡ αὔριον (i.e. ἡμέρα), see at {αὔριον}; ἡ Λυδιστί (i.e. ἁρμονία) [Refs 4th c.BC+]; ὁ οἴκαδε πλοῦς [Refs 5th c.BC+], etc; but τό stands absolutely with Advs. of time and place, when one cannot (as in the preceding instances) supply a substantive, as κἀκεῖσε καὶ τὸ δεῦρο [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ὁ μὲν τὸ κεῖθεν, ὁ δὲ τὸ κεῖθεν [Refs 5th c.BC+] C) as RELATIVE PRONOUN in many dialects; both in nominative singular masculine ὅ, as κλῦθί μοι, ὃ χθιζὸς θεὸς ἤλυθες [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ὃ ἐξορύξη he who banishes him, [Refs]; and in the forms beginning with τ, especially in [Refs 8th c.BC+]: also in Ionic dialect Poets, ἐν τῷ κάθημαι [Refs 7th c.BC+]; τό [Refs]; τῶν[Refs]—Never in Comedy texts or Attic dialect Prose:—Epic dialect genitive singular τεῦ [Refs 8th c.BC+] D) CRASIS OF ARTICLE: D.a) Attic dialect ὁ, ἡ, τό, with ᾰ make ᾱ, as ἁνήρ, ἁλήθεια, τἀγαθόν, τᾄτιο; so οἱ, αἱ, τά, as ἅνδρες, τἀγαθ; also τοῦ, τῷ, as τἀγαθοῦ, τἀγαθῷ: ὁ, τό, οἱ, before e gives ου, οὑξ, οὑπί, οὑμός, τοὔργον, οὑπιχώριοι, etc; also τοῦ, as τοὐμοῦ, τοὐπιόντο; but ἅτερος, θάτερον ([musical notation]), Ionic dialect οὕτερος, τοὔτερον (see. ἕτερος), Attic dialect feminine ἡτέρα, dative θητέρᾳ (see. ἕτερος); τῷ loses the iota, τὠμῷ, τὠπιόντι: ὁ, τό, before ο gives ου, as Οὁδυσσεύς, Οὑλύμπιος, τοὔνομα: ὁ, τό, etc, before αυ gives ᾱυ, αὑτός, ταὐτό, ταὐτῷ (frequently written ἁτός, etc. in Inscrr. and Papyrus); so τὰ αὐτά=ταὐτά, αἱ αὐταί=αὑταί: ἡ before εὐ gives ηὑ, as ηὑλάβεια: τῇ before ἡ gives θη, as θἠμέρᾳ: τὸ before ὑ gives θου, as θοὔδωρ for τὸ ὕδωρ. D.b) other dialects: in their treatment of crasis these follow the local laws of contraction, hence, e.g, Doric dialect ὡξ from ὁ ἐξ [Refs 3rd c.BC+]; Ionic dialect ᾡσυμνήτης from ὁ αἰς-[Refs 5th c.BC+]; ὡυτή from ἡ αὐτή [Refs 1st c.AD+]
Strongs
Word:
ὁ
Transliteration:
ho
Pronounciation:
to
Language:
Greek
Definition:
the (sometimes to be supplied, at others omitted, in English idiom); the, this, that, one, he, she, it, etc; the definite article
having believed
Strongs:
Lexicon:
πιστεύω
Greek:
πεπιστευκότων
Transliteration:
pepisteukotōn
Context:
Next word
Gloss:
to trust (in)
Morphhology:
Verb Perfect Active Participle Genitive Plural Neuter
Grammar:
an ACTION that was happening - done by neuter people or things that something belongs to
Source:
Identical in all sources
Additional:
to trust (in)
Tyndale
Word:
πιστεύω
Transliteration:
pisteuō
Gloss:
to trust (in)
Morphhology:
Greek Verb
Definition:
πιστεύω, [in LXX chiefly for אמן hi;] 1) intrans, to have faith (in), to believe; in cl, with accusative, dative, in NT also with prep, (on the significance of the various constructions, see M, Pr., 67f; Vau. on Rom.4:5; Ellic. on 1Ti.1:16; Abbott, JV, 19-80): absol, Mat.24:23, 26 Mrk.13:21, 1Co.11:18; with accusative of thing(s), Act.13:41, 1Co.13:7; with dative of person(s) (to believe what one says), Mrk.16:[13, 14], 1Jn.4:1; τ. ψεύδει, 2Th.2:11; περί. ὅτι, Jhn.9:18; esp. and most frequently with reference to religious belief: absol, Mat.8:13, Mrk.5:36, Luk.8:50, Jhn.11:40, al; before ὅτι, Mat.9:28, al; with dative (see supr, and cf. DB, i, 829a), Jhn.3:12 5:24 6:30 8:31, Act.16:34, Gal.3:6 " (LXX), 2Ti.1:12, 1Jn.5:10, al; with prep, (expressing personal trust and reliance as distinct from mere credence or belief; see M, Pr., l.with; DB, i, 829b), to believe in or on: ἐν (Psa.77 (78):22, al.), Mrk.1:15 (see Swete, in l.); εἰς, Mat.18:6, Jhn.2:11 (see Westc, in l.), and freq, Act.10:43 19:4, Rom.10:14, Gal.2:16, Php.1:29, I Jhn.5:10, 1Pe.1:8; εἰς τ. ὄνομα, Jhn.1:12 2:23 3:18, 1Jn.5:13; ἐπί, with accusative, Mat.27:42, Act.9:42 11:17 16:31 22:19, Rom.4:5; ἐπί, with dative, Rom.9:33 (LXX) 10:11 (ib.), 1Ti.1:16, 1Pe.2:6 " (LXX); ptcp. pres, οἱ π, as subst, Act.2:44, Rom.3:22, 1Co.1:21, al; aor, Mrk.16:[16], Act.4:32; pf, Act.19:18 21:20 (on Johannine use of the tenses of π, see Westc, Epp. Jo., 120). 2) Trans, to entrust: with accusative and dative, Luk.16:11, Jhn.2:24; pass, to be entrusted with: with accusative, Rom.3:2, 1Co.9:17, Gal.2:7, 1Th.2:4 (see Lft, Notes, 21f.), 1Ti.1:11, Tit.1:3. (AS)
Liddell-Scott-Jones
Word:
πιστεύω
Transliteration:
pisteuō
Gloss:
to trust (in)
Morphhology:
Greek Verb
Definition:
πιστ-εύω, future -εύσω: pluperfect πεπιστεύκειν [NT]: (πίστις):—trust, put faith in, rely on a person, thing, or statement, τινι [Refs 5th c.BC+]; [σημείοις] [Refs 5th c.BC+] adjective or pronoun, λόγοις ἐμοῖσι πίστευσον τάδε believe my words herein, [NT+5th c.BC+]; εἰς τὸ ὄνομά τινος[NT]: absolutely, believe, περὶ μὲν τούτου. οὔτε ἀπιστέω οὔτε ὦν π. τι λίην [Refs 5th c.BC+]; χαλεπὰ παντὶ ἑξῆς τεκμηρίῳ πιστεῦσαι although it is hard to believe every single bit of evidence about them, [Refs 5th c.BC+] entertain a confident opinion, [Refs]:—passive, to be trusted or believed, ἄνδρες ἄξιοι πιστεύεσθαι [Refs 5th c.BC+]; πιστευθῆναι ὑπό τινος enjoy his confidence,[Refs 4th c.BC+]; ὡς πιστευθησόμενος as if he would be believed, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; πιστεύονται [οἱ λόγοι] [Refs]; ἐπιστεύοντο ἃ ἔλεγον they were believed in what they said, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; πρόγνωσιν ἐπεπίστευντο were believed to possess foreknowledge, [Refs 1st c.AD+] 2) comply, ὡς οὐχ ὑπείξων οὐδὲ πιστεύσων λέγει; [Refs 5th c.BC+]; opposed to ἀπιστέω, [Refs] 3) with infinitive, believe that, feel confident that a thing is, will be, has been, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; π. ὡς, ὅτι, [Refs 5th c.BC+]infinitive is sometimes omitted, τὰ μὲν οὐ πιστεύουσιν οἱ νέοι (i.e. εἶναι or γεγονέναι) [Refs]:—passive, παρὰ Διὸς. οἱ νόμοι πεπιστευμένοι ἦσαν γεγονέναι [Refs 5th c.BC+]; πιστευθεὶς ἀληθεύσειν believed sure to, [Refs 5th c.BC+]: without infinitive, πιστευθείσης εἱμαρμένης αἴρεται πᾶσα νουθεσία [Refs 2nd c.AD+] 4) with dative et infinitive, τοῖσι ἐπίστευε σιγᾶν to whom he trusted that they would keep silence, [Refs 5th c.BC+] 5) have faith, [NT] II) π. τινί τι entrust something to another, τινὶ ἡγεμονίαν, χρήματα, [Refs 5th c.BC+]:—middle, have entrusted to one, ἀρχήν Berichte der russ. Akad. fuür Gesch. der materiellen Kultur [Refs 2nd c.AD+] —passive, πιστεύεσθαί τι to be entrusted with a thing, have it committed to one, παρά or ὑπό τινος, [Refs 3rd c.BC+]: with infinitive, πιστευθέντας τοῖς ἐχθροῖς διαφθείρειν [Refs 4th c.BC+]: with genitive, πιστευθεὶς τῆς Κύπρου [Refs 2nd c.BC+]
Strongs
Word:
πιστεύω
Transliteration:
pisteúō
Pronounciation:
pist-yoo'-o
Language:
Greek
Morphhology:
Verb
Definition:
to have faith (in, upon, or with respect to, a person or thing), i.e. credit; by implication, to entrust (especially one's spiritual well-being to Christ); believe(-r), commit (to trust), put in trust with; from g4102 (πίστις)
of the Gentiles
Strongs:
Lexicon:
ἔθνος
Greek:
ἐθνῶν
Transliteration:
ethnōn
Context:
Next word
Gloss:
Gentile nation
Morphhology:
Noun Genitive Plural Neuter
Grammar:
neuter PEOPLE OR THINGS that something belongs to
Source:
Identical in all sources
Additional:
Gentiles, Gentile @ Gen.10.5
Tyndale
Word:
ἔθνος
Origin:
the Greek of h1471G
Transliteration:
ethnos
Gloss:
Gentiles
Morphhology:
Greek Noun Neuter
Definition:
ἔθνος, -ους, τό, [in LXX chiefly for עַם,גּוֹי;] 1) a multitude, a company, whether of beasts or men (Hom.). 2) a nation, people: Mat.21:43 24:7, Mrk.13:8, Luk.22:25, Act.10:35, al; in sing, of the Jewish people, Luk.7:5 23:2, Jhn.11:48, 50-53 18:35, Act.10:22 24:3, 10 26:4 28:19. 3) In pl, as in OT, τὰ ἔ. (like Heb. הַגּוֹיִם), the nations, as distinct from Israel, Gentiles: Mat.4:15 6:32, Act.26:17, Rom.3:29 11:11 15:10, Gal.2:8, al; of Gentile Christians, Rom.11:13 15:27 16:4, Gal.2:12, 14, Eph.3:1. SYN.: λαός (see DCG, ii, 229; Cremer, 226). (AS)
Liddell-Scott-Jones
Word:
ἔθνος
Origin:
the Greek of h1471G
Transliteration:
ethnos
Gloss:
Gentiles
Morphhology:
Greek Noun Neuter
Definition:
ἔθνος, εος, τό: (ϝέθνος,[Refs 8th c.BC+]: - number of people living together, company, body of men, ἑτάρων ἔ, ἔ. ἑταίρων, band of comrades, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ἔθνος λαῶν host of men, [Refs]; of particular tribes, Αυκίων μέγα ἔ. [Refs 8th c.BC+]; of animals, ἔ. μελισσάων, ὀρνίθων, μυιάων, swarms, flocks, etc, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ἔ. ἀνέρων, γυναικῶν, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἔ. βρότεον, θνατόν, [Refs]; ἔ. τόδε, of the Erinyes, [Refs 4th c.BC+] 2) after [Refs 8th c.BC+], nation, people, τὸ Μηδικὸν ἔ. (γένος being a subdivision of ἔθνος) [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἔ. ἠπειρογενές, μαχαιροφόρον, [Refs 5th c.BC+] 2.b) later, τὰ ἔ. foreign, barbarous nations, opposed to Ἕλληνες, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; ἔ. νομάδων, of Bedawîn, [Refs]; at Athens, athletic clubs of non-Athenians, [Refs], non-Jews,[LXX+NT] 2.c) at Rome, = provinciae, [Refs 2nd c.AD+]: so in singular, province, ὁ τυραννήσας τοῦ ἔθνους [Refs 1st c.AD+]; ὁ ἡγούμενος τοῦ ἔθνους the governor of the province, [Refs 3rd c.AD+] 3) class of men, caste, tribe, τὸ Θετταλῶν. πενεστικὸν ἔ. [Refs 5th c.BC+]; οἶσθά τι ἔ. ἠλιθιώτερον ῥαψῳδῶ; [Refs 5th c.BC+]; δημιουργικὸν ἔ. [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὰ ἱερὰ ἔ. the orders of priests, [Refs 2nd c.BC+]; trade-associations or guilds, ἔθνη καὶ ἐργαστήρια [Refs 3rd c.BC+]; class in respect to rank or station, οὐ πρὸς τοῦτο βλέποντες. ὅπως. ἕν τι ἔ. ἔσται διαφερόντως εὔδαιμον [Refs 5th c.BC+] 4) sex, θῆλυ, ἄρρεν ἔ, [Refs 5th c.BC+] 5) part, member, [Refs 5th c.BC+] II) of a single person, a relation, [Refs 5th c.BC+]
Strongs
Word:
ἔθνος
Transliteration:
éthnos
Pronounciation:
eth'-nos
Language:
Greek
Morphhology:
Noun Neuter
Definition:
a race (as of the same habit), i.e. a tribe; specially, a foreign (non-Jewish) one (usually, by implication, pagan); Gentile, heathen, nation, people; probably from g1486 (ἔθω)
we ourselves
Strongs:
Lexicon:
ἐγώ
Greek:
ἡμεῖς
Transliteration:
hēmeis
Context:
Next word
Gloss:
I/we
Morphhology:
Personal pronoun 1st Nominative Plural
Grammar:
a reference to recently mentioned people or things that are speaking or writing that are doing something
Source:
Identical in all sources
Alternates:
Tyndale
Word:
μέ
Origin:
a Form of g1473
Transliteration:
me
Gloss:
me
Morphhology:
Greek Personal Pronoun (1st person)
Definition:
1. apostrophe for με. 2. rarely for μοι, (Homer) (ML)
Liddell-Scott-Jones
Word:
μέ
Origin:
a Form of g1473
Transliteration:
me
Gloss:
me
Morphhology:
Greek Personal Pronoun (1st person)
Definition:
ἐγώ, I: pronoun of the first person:—Epic dialect mostly ἐγών before vowels (so in Doric dialect, before consonants, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; Boeotian dialect ἱών [Refs 2nd c.AD+]:— strengthened ἔγωγε, I at least, for my part, indeed, for myself (more frequently in Attic dialect than in [Refs 8th c.BC+]: Doric dialect ἐγώνγα [Refs 7th c.BC+]: Boeotian dialect ἱώνγα [Refs 6th c.BC+]; ἱώνει [Refs]; ἰώγα [Refs 5th c.BC+]: Laconian dialect and Tarentum dialect ἐγώνη, [Refs 2nd c.AD+] II) oblique cases from a different root, genitive ἐμοῦ, enclitic μο; Ionic dialect and Epic dialect ἐμέο, ἐμεῦ, μευ, also ἐμέθεν [Refs 8th c.BC+]; Aeolic dialect ἔμεθεν [Refs 7th c.BC+]; Doric dialect ἐμέος, ἐμεῦς, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; Boeotian dialect ἐμοῦς [Refs 6th c.BC+] — _dative_ ἐμοί, enclitic μοι (which may be compared with Sanskrit genitive me in κλῦθί μοι [Refs 8th c.BC+]; Doric dialect ἐμίν [Refs 5th c.BC+]; Tarentum dialect ἐμίνη [Refs 3rd c.BC+], enclitic μ; [Refs 5th c.AD+] III) dual, nominative and accusative, νῶι, we two, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; accusative νῶιν Zenod.ad [Refs 8th c.BC+]; Attic dialect νώ [Refs 8th c.BC+]; νῶι dative, [Refs 5th c.AD+]; νῶιν, ={ἡμῖν}, [Refs 4th c.AD+] IV) plural, nominative ἡμεῖς (ἡμέες falsa lectio in [Refs 5th c.BC+]; Aeolic dialect ἄμμες [Refs 8th c.BC+]; Doric dialect ἁμές [Refs 7th c.BC+]; Ionic dialect ἡμέων [Refs 8th c.BC+]; Aeolic dialect ἀμμέων [Refs 7th c.BC+]; ἄμμων [Refs 2nd c.AD+]; Doric dialect ἁμέων [Refs 7th c.BC+]; ἁμῶν [[Refs 5th c.BC+]; Cretan dialect, Boeotian dialect ἁμίων [Refs 5th c.BC+] (ῐ) (or ἧμιν Aristarch.ad [Refs 8th c.BC+]; also rarely in Comedy texts, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; Aeolic dialect ἄμμῐν, ἄμμῐ, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; Doric dialect also ἁμίν or ἇμιν, [Refs 7th c.BC+]; with ῑ, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; Ionic dialect ἡμέας [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ἥμεας [Refs 8th c.BC+]; Aeolic dialect ἄμμε [Refs 8th c.BC+], Theocr.8.25; Doric dialect ἁμέ [Refs 6th c.BC+]—On these dialectic varieties, [Refs 2nd c.AD+] ff. (Cf. Sanskrit ahám (ἐγών), accusative plural asmā´n; for νώ cf. Sanskrit nau):—frequently in answers, as an affirmative, especially in form ἔγωγε, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; οὗτος ἐ. here am [Refs 5th c.BC+]; rarely with Article, τὸν ἐμέ myself, [Refs 5th c.BC+] the Self, the Ego, [Refs 5th c.AD+]; τίς ὢν οὗτος ὁ ἐγὼ τυγχάν; [Refs 4th c.BC+]; τί τοῦτ᾽ ἐμο; ἡμῖν τί τοῦτ᾽ ἔστ; Latin quid mea hoc refert? [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἐγ; in a question, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἡμεῖς the self, ἔνθα δὴ ἡμεῖς μάλιστα [Refs 3rd c.AD+]
Strongs
Word:
μέ
Transliteration:
mé
Pronounciation:
meh
Language:
Greek
Definition:
me; I, me, my; a shorter (and probably original) form of g1691 (ἐμέ)
wrote to
Strongs:
Lexicon:
ἐπιστέλλω
Greek:
ἐπεστείλαμεν
Transliteration:
epesteilamen
Context:
Next word
Gloss:
to write to
Morphhology:
Verb Aorist Active Indicative 1st Plural
Grammar:
an ACTION that happened - by people or things that are speaking or writing
Source:
Identical in Nestle/Aland and King James sources, noted difference in other sources
Alternates:
Tyndale
Word:
ἐπιστέλλω
Transliteration:
epistellō
Gloss:
to write to
Morphhology:
Greek Verb
Definition:
ἐπι-στέλλω [in LXX: 3Ki.5:8 Neh.6:19 (שָׁלַח), Jdth.15:4, 1Ma.10:25 1Mac 12:7 1Mac 13:18 (in each case with seel. ἀποσ-) *;] 1) to send to. 2) to send a message by letter, to write word (MM, Exp., xiv): with dative of person(s), Act.21:25, Heb.13:22; before τοῦ, with inf, Act.15:20. (AS)
Liddell-Scott-Jones
Word:
ἐπιστέλλω
Transliteration:
epistellō
Gloss:
to write to
Morphhology:
Greek Verb
Definition:
ἐπιστέλλω, send to, γράψας ἐς βυβλίον τάδε ἐπέστειλε ἐς Σάμον [Refs 5th c.BC+]; send a message, τάδε [Refs 5th c.BC+]; especially by letter, write word, τοιαῦτα [Refs 5th c.BC+]; περί τινος ὡς ἀδικοῦντος [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὰ ἐπισταλέντα ἐκ τῆς Σάμου the news received from Samos,[Refs 1st c.AD+] 2). enjoin, command, τισί τι [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὸν ἄγγελον ἐπιστείλας ταῦτα ἔπεμψε [Refs 5th c.BC+]: c.infinitive, ἐ. τινὶ ἀπίστασθαι [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ὁ Κῦρος αὐτῷ ἐπέστελλε πρὸς Πέρσας λέγειν [Refs 5th c.BC+]; also ἐ. τινὰ ποιεῖν τι [Refs 5th c.BC+]: without any case, give orders to do, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; give orders in writing, [Refs 4th c.BC+] — passive, ἔφη οὐδέν οἱ ἐπεστάλθαι ἄλλο ἢ ἀπαλλάσσεσθαι he had received orders to, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; αἷς ἐπέσταλται τέλος to whom the office has been committed, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἀξιῶ ἐπισταλῆναί τισι c.infinitive, [Refs 2nd c.AD+] having received these instructions, [Refs 5th c.BC+]: in later writers, usually of orders given in writing, [NT+2nd c.AD+], etc; of orders for payment, [Refs 2nd c.AD+]
Strongs
Word:
ἐπιστέλλω
Transliteration:
epistéllō
Pronounciation:
ep-ee-stel'-lo
Language:
Greek
Morphhology:
Verb
having adjudged
Strongs:
Lexicon:
κρίνω
Greek:
κρίναντες
Transliteration:
krinantes
Context:
Next word
Gloss:
to judge
Morphhology:
Verb Aorist Active Participle Nominative Plural Masculine
Grammar:
an ACTION that was happening - done by male people or things that are doing something
Source:
Identical in all sources
Tyndale
Word:
κρίνω
Transliteration:
krinō
Gloss:
to judge
Morphhology:
Greek Verb
Definition:
κρίνω, [in LXX chiefly for שׁפט, also for ריב,דּין, etc;] 1) to separate, select, choose (cl; in LXX: 2Ma.13:15). 2) to approve, esteem: Rom.14:5. 3) to be of opinion, judge, think: Luk.7:43, 1Co.11:13; before τοῦτο ὅτι, 2Co.5:14; with accusative and inf, Act.16:15; with accusative and pred, Act.13:46 26:8. 4) to decide, determine, decree: with accusative, Act.16:4, Rom.14:13, 1Co.7:37, 2Co.2:1; with inf. (Field, Notes, 167), Act.20:16 25:25, 1Co.2:2 5:3, Tit.3:12 (cf. 1Ma.11:33, Wis.8:9, al.); with accusative and inf, Act.21:25 27:1. 5) to judge, adjudge, pronounce judgment: absol, Jhn.8:16, 26; before κατά, with accusative, Jhn.7:24 8:15; κρίσιν κ, Jhn.7:24; τ. δίκαιον, Luk.12:57 (Deiss, LAE, 118); in forensic sense, Jhn.18:31, Act.23:3, al; pass, Rom.3:4 (LXX); of God's judgment, Jhn.5:30 8:50, Rom.2:16 3:6, 2Ti.4:1, 1Pe.4:5, al. 6) = κατακρίνω, to condemn (cl.): Act.13:27; of God's judgment, Jhn.3:18 5:22 12:47, 48, Act.7:7, Rom.2:12, 1Co.11:32, Heb.10:30 " (LXX), Jas.5:9, Rev.19:2, al. 7) As in LXX (for שׁפט), to rule, govern (4Ki.15:5, Psa.2:10, al.): Mat.19:28, Luk.22:30, 1Co.6:3. 8) to bring to trial (cl.); mid, to go to law: with dative of person(s), Mat.5:40; before μετά, with genitive of person(s) (of the opponent), ἐπί, with genitive (of the judge), 1Co.6:1, 6 (cf. ἀνα, ἀπο, ἀντ-απο- (-μαι), δια, ἐν, ἐπι, κατα, συν, ὑπο- (-μαι), συν-υπο- (-μαι)). SYN.: see: δικάστης. (AS)
Liddell-Scott-Jones
Word:
κρίνω
Transliteration:
krinō
Gloss:
to judge
Morphhology:
Greek Verb
Definition:
κρίνω [ῑ], Epic dialect 3rd.person etc for 1st.person, 2nd.person singular indicative κρίνησι (δια-) falsa lectio in [Refs 3rd c.BC+]: future κρῐνῶ, Epic dialect, Ionic dialect κρῐνέω (δια-) [Refs 8th c.BC+]: aorist [Refs 8th c.BC+], etc: perfect [Refs 6th c.BC+], etc:—middle, future [Refs 5th c.BC+], but in passive sense, [Refs 5th c.BC+]: aorist [Refs 8th c.BC+], etc:—passive, future [Refs 5th c.BC+], etc: aorist ἐκρίθην [ῐ] [Refs 5th c.BC+]; Epic dialect optative κρινθεῖτε (δια-) [Refs 8th c.BC+], participle [Refs 8th c.BC+], infinitive [Refs 3rd c.BC+]: perfect [Refs 5th c.BC+], etc; infinitive κεκρίσθαι (ἀπο-) [Refs 5th c.BC+] — _Aeolic dialect_ κρίννω uncertain in [Refs]: aorist ἔκριννε [Refs] 6.28(Mytil, ἐπ-); infinitive κρίνναι [Refs]:—Thess. present infinitive κρεννέμεν [Refs]:—separate, put asunder, distinguish, [Refs 8th c.BC+], etc:—also middle, [Refs 5th c.BC+]:—passive, [Refs 5th c.BC+]. II) pick out, choose, [Refs 8th c.BC+], etc:—middle, κρίνασθαι ἀρίστους to choose the best, [Refs 8th c.BC+] —passive, to be chosen out, distinguished, [Refs]; especiallyin partt, κεκριμένος picked out, chosen, [Refs 8th c.BC+] distinguished for, [Refs 5th c.BC+] approved. , [Refs] proved by sea and land, [Refs 1st c.AD+] numbered among, conjecture in [Refs 5th c.BC+]. II.2) decide disputes, [Refs 8th c.BC+]: c.accusative cognate, οἳ. σκολιὰς κρίνωσι θέμιστας judge crooked judgements, [Refs 8th c.BC+], etc; πρώτας δίκας κρίνοντες αἵματος [Refs 6th c.BC+]; κρίνουσι βοῇ καὶ οὐ ψήφῳ they decide the question, [Refs 6th c.BC+]; τῷ τοῦτο κρίνει; by what do you form this judgement? [Refs 5th c.BC+] — passive, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; κἂν ἰσόψηφος κριθῇ (i.e. ἡ δίκη) [Refs] a decision being about to be taken, [Refs 2nd c.AD+] II.2.b) decide a contest, e.g. for a prize, [Refs 6th c.BC+]: with accusative person, κ. τὰς θεάς decide their contest, i.e. judge them, [Refs 5th c.BC+] —passive, [Refs 6th c.BC+]:—middle and passive, of persons, have a contest decided, come to issue, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; dispute, contend, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; κρίνεσθαι μετά τινος variant in [LXX+1st c.BC+]; compete in games, with accusative cognate, [Refs]: perfect participle, decided, clear, strong, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; πόνοι κεκρ. decided, ended, [Refs 5th c.BC+] II.2.c) win a battle, [Refs 2nd c.BC+]. II.3) adjudge, [Refs 5th c.BC+]:—passive, [Refs 5th c.BC+] II.3.b) absolutely, judge, give judgement, [Refs 6th c.BC+] II.3.c) in Medicine texts, bring to a crisis, [Refs 5th c.BC+], +others:—passive, of a sick person, come to a crisis, [Refs 5th c.BC+] (also impersonal in active, ἔκρινε τούτοισιν ἑνδεκαταίοισιν the crisis came, [Refs 1st c.BC+]. II.4) judge of, estimate, πρὸς ἐμαυτὸν κρίνων [αὐτόν] judging of him by myself, [Refs 6th c.BC+]:—passive, [Refs 5th c.BC+]. II.5) expound, interpret in a particular way, [Refs 5th c.BC+] —in middle, [Refs 8th c.BC+]. II.6) with accusative et infinitive, decide or judge that, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; so, with the infinitive omitted, [Refs 6th c.BC+]:—passive, [Refs 5th c.BC+] II.7) decide in favour of, prefer, choose, [Refs 6th c.BC+] (passive); [Refs 5th c.BC+]; choose between, [Refs 3rd c.BC+]. II.8) c.infinitive only, determine to do a thing, [NT+2nd c.BC+] with whom he chooses to live, [Refs 4th c.BC+]. II.9) form a judgement of a thing, [Refs 3rd c.BC+]. III) in Trag, question, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; εἴ νιν πρὸς βίαν κρίνειν θέλοις [Refs]. III.2) bring to trial, accuse, [Refs 4th c.BC+] judge (in matters) of life and death, [Refs 6th c.BC+]; κ. τινὰ κακώσεως ἐπαρχίας, Latin repetundarum, [Refs 1st c.AD+] —passive, to be brought to trial, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; κρίνομαι πρὸς Σωφρόνη; [Refs 4th c.BC+]: with genitive criminis, [Refs 5th c.BC+]: absolutely, [Refs 4th c.BC+]. III.3) pass sentence upon, condemn, [Refs 4th c.BC+] — passive, to be judged, condemned, [NT]; τὰ κεκριμένα the judgement of a court, [Refs 2nd c.AD+]-yω ἐ-κρῐ-ν-σα, cf. Latin cerno (from *cr[icaron]-n-), crībrum (from *crei-dhrom).)
Strongs
Word:
κρίνω
Transliteration:
krínō
Pronounciation:
kree'-no
Language:
Greek
Morphhology:
Verb
Definition:
by implication, to try, condemn, punish; avenge, conclude, condemn, damn, decree, determine, esteem, judge, go to (sue at the) law, ordain, call in question, sentence to, think; properly, to distinguish, i.e. decide (mentally or judicially)
nothing
Strongs:
Lexicon:
μηδείς
Greek:
μηδὲν
Transliteration:
mēden
Context:
Next word
Morphhology:
Adjective Accusative Singular Neuter Negative
Grammar:
DESCRIBING a neuter person or thing that is having something done to them
Source:
Identical in King James sources, absent in Nestle/Aland and other sources
Tyndale
Word:
μηδείς
Transliteration:
mēdeis
Gloss:
nothing
Morphhology:
Greek Adjective
Definition:
μηδείς, -δεμία, -δέν (and -θέν, Act.27:33, a Hellenistic form; see Bl, 6, 7; Thackeray, Gr., 58) related to οὐδείς as μή to οὐ, no, none, no one; neut, nothing: Mat.16:20, Mrk.5:43 6:8, Luk.3:14, Act.8:24, Rom.13:8, al; with genitive, Act.4:17 24:23; neut. accusative, μηδέν, adverbially, in no respect, Act.10:20 11:12; as accusative obj. after verb, βλάπτειν, Luk.4:35; ὠφελεῖσθαι, Mrk.5:26; ὑστερεῖν, 2Co.11:5; μεριμνᾶν, Php.4:6; in double negation, strengthening the denial, μηκέτι μ, Mrk.11:14, Act.4:17; μὴ. μηδέν (μηδένα, μηδεμίαν), 2Co.13:7, 2Th.2:3, 1Pe.3:6 μηθείς, see. μηδείς (AS)
Liddell-Scott-Jones
Word:
μηδείς
Transliteration:
mēdeis
Gloss:
nothing
Morphhology:
Greek Adjective
Definition:
μηδείς, μηδεμίᾰ, μηδέν (i.e. μηδὲ εἷς, μηδὲ μία, μηδὲ ἕν): feminine μηδὲ ἴα or μηδεΐα (or -έϊα) [Refs]:— not one, not even one, nobody (in neuter nothing), once in [Refs 8th c.BC+] 2) μηδὲ εἷς (so written) is found in Attic dialect Inscrr, as [Refs]not even one, μηδὲ ἕν [Refs 5th c.BC+]: frequently with an intervening Particle or preposition, μηδ᾽ ἂν ἕνα [Refs 5th c.BC+]; μηδ᾽ ὑφ᾽ ἑνός, μηδ᾽ ὑπὸ μιᾶς, [Refs] II) nobody, naught, good for naught, κἄμ᾽ ἴσον τῷ μ. [Refs 5th c.BC+]; μηδέν or τὸ μηδέν as substantive, naught, nothing, κεἰ τὸ μ. ἐξερῶ [Refs]; μ. λέγειν to say what is naught, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; of persons, τὸ μ. a good-for-nothing, τὸ μ. εἶναι, of a eunuch, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἧττον αὐτοῖς ἔνι ἢ τὸ μ, i.e. it is a mere impossibility, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; also μ. εἶναι without the Article, [Refs 2nd c.AD+] III) neuter μηδέν as adverb, not at all, by no means, μηδὲν ἐγκέλευ᾽ ἄγαν [Refs 5th c.BC+]: with an adverb, μ. αἰνικτηρίως [Refs 5th c.BC+] — When other negatives, also derived from μή, are used with it, they do not destroy, but strengthen the negation, μηδέποτε μηδὲν αἰσχρὸν ποιήσας ἔλπιζε λήσειν never hope to escape, when you have done anything base. [Refs 5th c.BC+]; compare μηθείς.
Strongs
Word:
μηδείς
Transliteration:
mēdeís
Pronounciation:
may-den'
Language:
Greek
Morphhology:
Adjective
such
Strongs:
Lexicon:
τοιοῦτος
Greek:
τοιοῦτον
Transliteration:
toiouton
Context:
Next word
Gloss:
such as this
Morphhology:
Demonstrative pronoun Accusative Singular Masculine
Grammar:
a reference to SPECIFIC a male person or thing that is having something done to them
Source:
Identical in King James sources, absent in Nestle/Aland and other sources
Tyndale
Word:
τοιοῦτος
Transliteration:
toioutos
Gloss:
such as this
Morphhology:
Greek Demonstrative Pronoun
Definition:
τοιοῦτος, -αύτη, -οῦτο (as usually in Att. prose. Ep. and Ion. neut. -οῦτον in Al, Act.21:25, Rec. only), correlat. of οἷος, ὁποῖος, ὥς, etc, such as this, of such a kind, such: Mat.9:8 18:5, Mrk.4:33 6:2 7:13 9:37 (T, τούτων), Jhn.9:16, Act.16:24, 1Co.5:1 11:16, 2Co.3:4 3:12 12:3, Heb.7:26 8:1 12:3 13:16, Jas.4:16; οἷος. τ, 1Co.15:48, 2Co.10:11; id. pleonast. (see Bl, § 50, 4), Mrk.13:19; before ὁποῖος, Act.26:29; ὥς, Phm 9. As subst, anarth: pl, Luk.9:9; with art, ὁ τ, such a one (Bl, § 47, 9; Ellic. on Gal.5:21): Act.22:22, 1Co.5:5, al; pl, Mat.19:14, Mrk.10:14, al; neut. pl, Act.19:25, Rom.1:32, al (AS)
Liddell-Scott-Jones
Word:
τοιοῦτος
Transliteration:
toioutos
Gloss:
such as this
Morphhology:
Greek Demonstrative Pronoun
Definition:
τοιοῦτος, αύτη, οῦτο, Attic dialect also -οῦτον[Refs 5th c.BC+], which is the Epic dialect form (see. [Refs 8th c.BC+], and seems to prevail in [Refs 5th c.BC+]: both forms occur in Papyrus, τοιοῦτον [Refs 5th c.BC+]:—Aeolic dialect τέουτος [Refs 7th c.BC+] —a stronger form of τοῖος, bearing the same relation to τοιόσδε as οὗτος to ὅδε, such as this, in [Refs 8th c.BC+] but in Attic dialect the most common of the three forms; antecedent to οἷος, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; to ὡς, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; to ὅς, ὅς, ὅσπερ, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; to οἷόσπερ, see reading in [Refs 5th c.BC+]; less frequently to a conjunction, as ὥστε, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; frequently with implications, so good, so noble, so bad, etc, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; τοιοῦτον. ἐστὶ τὸ. τέλειον ἄνδρα εἶναι so great a thing is it, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τοιοῦτος ὤν being such a wretch, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; εἴς τι τοιοῦτον ἐμπίπτειν οὗ. into such a condition in which, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; frequently coupled with τοσοῦτος, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; with οὗτος, [Refs 5th c.BC+] just as he (she, it) is, of slaves or animals for sale, [Refs 2nd c.AD+]; εἰς σὲ τοιοῦτος ἐγένετο, τ. γίγνου περὶ τοὺς γονεῖς, so disposed towards, [Refs 5th c.BC+] such in thy words, [Refs 5th c.BC+] such another, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἕτερα τοιαῦτα, ἕτερον τοιοῦτον, [Refs]; referring to what precedes, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; used instead of repeating an adjective, ἀθάνατος εἶναι καὶ στρατιῆς τ. ἄρχειν [Refs 5th c.BC+]: with the Article, οἱ τοιοῦτοι [Refs 5th c.BC+] 2) the sense is made more indefinite in τοιοῦτός τις or τις τοιοῦτος such a one, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; in this case it may frequently be rendered by an adverb, ἡ διάρριψις τοιαύτη τις ἐγένετο took place in this wise, [Refs 5th c.BC+] 3) τὸτ. such a proceeding, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; διὰ τὸ τ. for such a reason, [Refs]; ἐν τῷ τ. in such a case, [Refs]such a place, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; also ἐν τ. εἶναι τοῦ κινδύνου to be in such a state of peril, [Refs] 4) in narrative, τοιαῦτα properly refers to what goes before, τοιαῦτα μὲν δὴ ταῦτα [Refs 5th c.BC+] 4.b) after a question, τοιαῦτα affirms like{ταῦτα} (see. οὗτος with VII.1), just so, even so, [Refs 5th c.BC+] 5) τοιαῦτα absolutely, τἂ πλοῖα, τὰ τοιαῦτα ships and suchlike, [Refs 4th c.BC+] 6) τοιαῦτα as adverb, in such wise, [Refs 5th c.BC+] adverb τοιούτως only late, [Refs] —Cf. τοσοῦτος. [τοῐ- frequently in Trag. and Comedy texts, e.g. [Refs 5th c.BC+]; compare τοιόσδε near the end]
Strongs
Word:
τοιοῦτος
Transliteration:
toioûtos
Pronounciation:
toy-oo'-tos
Language:
Greek
Morphhology:
Adjective
to keep
Strongs:
Lexicon:
τηρέω
Greek:
τηρεῖν
Transliteration:
tērein
Context:
Next word
Morphhology:
Verb Present Active Infinitive
Grammar:
an ACTION that is to happen
Source:
Identical in King James sources, absent in Nestle/Aland and other sources
Additional:
to keep, protect
Tyndale
Word:
τηρέω
Origin:
a Meaning of g5083G
Transliteration:
tēreō
Gloss:
to keep: protect
Morphhology:
Greek Verb
Definition:
τηρέω, -ῶ [in LXX for שָׁמַר, נָצַר, etc;] 1) to watch over, guard, keep, preserve: Mat.27:36, Act.16:23, al; ἑαυτόν, 2Co.11:9, 1Ti.5:22, Jas.1:27, Ju 21; before εἰς, Jhn.12:7, Act.25:21, 1Pe.1:4, 2Pe.2:4 2:9 3:7, Ju 6; ἐν, Jhn.17:11-12, Ju 21; ἐκ, Jhn.17:15, Rev.3:10; τ. πίστιν, 2Ti.4:7, Rev.14:12; τ. ἑνότητα τ. πνεύματος, Eph.4:3. 2) to watch, give heed to, observe: τ. σάββατον, Jhn.9:16; τ. ἐντολήν (-άς), Mat.19:17, Jhn.14:15 15:10, 1Ti.6:14, 1Jn.2:3-4 Jn 3:22 Jn 3:24 Jn 5:3, Rev.12:17 14:12; τ. λόγον (-ους), Jhn.8:51-52, 55 14:23-24 15:20 17:6, 1Jn.2:5, Rev.3:8, 10 22:7, 9; τ. νόμον, Act.15:5, Jas.2:10; τ. παράδοσιν, Mrk.7:9; τ. ἔργα, Rev.2:26; τ. γεγραμμένα, Rev.1:3 (cf. δια, παρα, συν-τηρέω) SYN.: φυλάσσω, implying custody and protection: τ. expresses the idea of watchful care and "may mark the result of which φ. is the means" (Thayer see word) (AS)
Liddell-Scott-Jones
Word:
τηρέω
Origin:
a Meaning of g5083G
Transliteration:
tēreō
Gloss:
to keep: protect
Morphhology:
Greek Verb
Definition:
τηρ-έω (τη- also in Doric dialect, [Refs 7th c.BC+], perfect τετήρηκα [Refs 4th c.BC+]:—watch over, take care of, guard, δώματα [Refs 5th c.BC+]; rarely of persons, δαιμόνων, αἵτινες τηροῦμεν ὑμᾶς [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τ. τὴν ἀρχήν maintain it, [Refs 2nd c.BC+] —passive, τὸ ἔξωθεν [τεῖχος] ἐτηρεῖτο was constantly guarded, [Refs 5th c.BC+]future middle τηρήσομαι in passive sense, [Refs] 2) τ. ὅπως. ἔσται take care that. , [Refs 4th c.BC+]; τ. μὴ. cavere ne. , [Refs 5th c.BC+]: also in middle, τηρώμεσθ᾽, ὅπως μὴ. αἰσθήσεται [Refs 5th c.BC+] 3) τηρεῖν ἀπὸ τοῦ πυρός protect them from the fire, i.e. cook them slowly, Bilabel Ὀψαρτ.[Refs] II) give heed to, watch narrowly, observe, τηρῶ αὐτοὺς οὐδὲ δοκῶν ὁρᾶν κλέπτοντας [Refs 5th c.BC+] II.2) watch for a person or thing, with a participle, παραστείχοντα τηρήσας [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἔνδον ὄντα τηρήσαντες αὐτόν having watched for his being within, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τ. τὸν πορθμὸν κατιόντος τοῦ ἀνέμου watching for a crossing with the wind blowing down, [Refs]; τ. τινὰ ἀνιόντα watch for one's coming up, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; νύκτα καὶ ὕδωρ, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; τὴν θήραν τ. [Refs] —passive, ὁ καιρὸς ἐτηρήθη was watched for, [Refs 5th c.BC+] II.3) absolutely, watch, keep watch, [Refs 5th c.BC+]: with infinitive, watch or look out, so as to, ἐτήρουν ἀνέμῳ καταφέρεσθαι [Refs 5th c.BC+] II.4) observe, notice, [μετακόσμησιν σωμάτων] [Refs 2nd c.AD+] II.5) test by observation or trial, τετηρημένον βοήθημα an approved method of treatment, [Refs 2nd c.AD+]; as Empiric term, τετηρημένης ἐπ᾽ αὐτοῖς τῆς θεραπείας, οὐκ ἐνδεικτικῶς εὑρισκομένης [Refs 2nd c.AD+] III) observe or keep an engagement, ὅρκους [NT+5th c.BC+] III.2) preserve, retain, τὰς αἰσθήσεις uncertain in [Refs 5th c.BC+]
Strongs > g5083
Word:
τηρέω
Transliteration:
tēréō
Pronounciation:
tay-reh'-o
Language:
Greek
Morphhology:
Verb
Definition:
perhaps akin to g2334 (θεωρέω)); to guard (from loss or injury, properly, by keeping the eye upon; and thus differing from g5442 (φυλάσσω), which is properly to prevent escaping; and from g2892 (κουστωδία), which implies a fortress or full military lines of apparatus), i.e. to note (a prophecy; figuratively, to fulfil a command); by implication, to detain (in custody; figuratively, to maintain); by extension, to withhold (for personal ends; figuratively, to keep unmarried); by extension, to withhold (for personal ends; figuratively, to keep unmarried); hold fast, keep(- er), (pre-, re-)serve, watch; from (a watch
them
Strongs:
Lexicon:
αὐτός
Greek:
αὐτούς
Transliteration:
autous
Context:
Next word
Gloss:
he/she/it/self
Morphhology:
Personal pronoun Accusative Plural Masculine
Grammar:
a reference to recently mentioned male people or things that are having something done to them
Source:
Identical in King James sources, absent in Nestle/Aland and other sources
Additional:
them
Alternates:
Tyndale
Word:
αὐτός
Transliteration:
autos
Gloss:
it/s/he
Morphhology:
Greek Personal Pronoun (3rd person)
Definition:
αὐτός, -ή, -ό, determinative pron., in late Gk. much more frequently than in cl. (WM, 178f; Jannaris, HGG, §1399). 1) Emphatic (so always in nom. exc. when preceded by the art, see infr, iii); (1) self (ipse), expressing opposition, distinction, exclusion, etc, αὐ. ἐκχυθήσεται, Luk.5:37; αὐ. ἐγινώσκεν, Jhn.2:25; αὐ.ὑμεῖς, Jhn.3:28; καὶ αὐ. ἐγώ, Rom.15:14; αὐ. Ἰησοῦς, Jhn.2:24; αὐ. καὶ οἱ μετ᾽ αὐτοῦ, Mrk.2:25; ὑμεῖς αὐ, Mrk.6:31; esp. (as freq in cl.) αὐ. ὁ, Mat.3:4, Mrk.6:17, Jhn.16:27, 1Th.3:11, al; in late Gk, sometimes weakened, ἐν αὐτῇ τ. ὥρᾳ, in that hour, Luk.10:21 (M, Pr., 91; MM, see word); (2) emphatic, he, she, it (M, Pr., 86; Bl, §48, 1, 2, 7), Mat.1:21, 12:50, Luk.6:35, al; pointing to some one as master (cl.), Mat.8:24, Mrk.4:38, al; αὐ, καὶ αὐ. = οὗτος, ὁ δε (BL, §48, 1), Mat.14:2, Mrk.14:15, 44, Luk.1:22, 2:28, al. 2) In oblique cases (cl.), for the simple pron. of 3rd of person(s), he, she, it, Mat.7:9, 10:12, 26:44, al; with ptcp. in genitive absol, Mat.9:18, Mrk.13:1, al. (for irreg. constructions, V. Bl, §74, 5); pleonastically after the relative (cf. Heb. אֲשֶׁר לוֹ; WM, 184ff; Bl, §50, 4; MM, see word), Mrk.7:25, Rev.3:8, 7:2, al; in constr. ad sensum, without proper subject expressly indicated, Mat.4:23, Act.8:5, 2Co.2:13, al; genitive αὐτοῦ = ἐκείνου, Rom.11:11, 1Th.2:19, Tit.3:5, Heb.2:4. 3) ὁ, ἡ, τὸ αὐ, the same: Heb.1:12, 13:8; τὸ αὐ, ποιεῖν, Mat.5:46, 47, al; φρονεῖν, Rom.12:16, 15:5, Php.2:2, al; τὰ αὐ, Act.15:27, Rom.2:1, al; κατὰ τὸ (τὰ) αὐ. (MM, see word), Act.14:1, Luk.6:23, al; ἐπὶ τὸ αὐ, together (MM, see word), Mat.22:34, Act.1:15, al; ἓν κ. τὸ αὐ, 1Co.11:5, 12:11; with dative (cl.), 1Co.11:5; with a noun, λόγος, Mrk.14:39; μέτρος, Php.1:30; πνεῦμα, 1Co.12:4. (AS)
Liddell-Scott-Jones
Word:
αὐτός
Transliteration:
autos
Gloss:
it/s/he
Morphhology:
Greek Personal Pronoun (3rd person)
Definition:
αὐτός (Cretan dialect ἀϝτός [Refs] (also αὐτόν[Refs], reflexive pronoun, self:—in oblique cases used for the personal pronoun, him, her, it:—with Article, ὁ αὐτός, ἡ αὐτή, τὸ αὐτό (also ταὐτόν), etc, the very one, the same. I) self, myself, thyself, etc, accusative to the person of the Verb: frequently joined with ἐγώ, σύ, etc. (see. below 10), I.1) one's true self, the soul, not the body, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; reversely, body, not soul, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; oneself, as opposed to others who are less prominent, as king to subject, [Refs]; man to wife and children, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; warrior to horses, [Refs 8th c.BC+], or to weapons, [Refs]; shepherd to herd, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; seamen to ships, [Refs]: generally, whole to parts,[Refs 5th c.BC+]: absolutely, the Master, as in the [Refs 4th c.BC+] Latin Ipse dixit; so τίς οὗτος;— Αὐτός, i.e. Socrates, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἀναβόησον Αὐτόν[Refs]the Master, [Refs 5th c.BC+] the result will show, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; especially αὐτὸ δείξει[Refs 5th c.BC+]; of things, the very, ὑπὸ λόφον αὐτόν, i.e. just, exactly under, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; πρὸς αὐταῖς ταῖς θύραις close by the door, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; αὐτὸ τὸ δέον the very thing needed, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; αὐτὸ τὸ περίορθρον the point of dawn, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; αὐτὰ τὰ ἐναντία the very opposite, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; even, οὔ μοι μέλει ἄλγος οὔτ᾽ αὐτῆς Ἑκάβης[Refs 8th c.BC+] —In these senses αὐτός in Prose either precedes both the _Article_ and substantive, or follows both, e.g. αὐτὸς ὁ υἱός or ὁ υἱὸς αὐτός. The Article is sometimes omitted with proper names, or Nouns denoting individuals, αὐτὸς Μένων[Refs 5th c.BC+] I.2) of oneself, of one's own accord, ἀλλά τις αὐ. ἴτω[Refs 8th c.BC+]; also, in person, τῶν πραγμάτων ὑμῖν. αὐτοῖς ἀντιληπτέον[Refs 4th c.BC+] I.3) by oneself or itself, alone, αὐτός περ ἐών although alone, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; αὐτὸς ἐγείναο παῖδ᾽, i.e. without a mother,[Refs 8th c.BC+]by himself, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; αὐτοὶ γάρ ἐσμεν we are by ourselves, i.e. among friends, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; αὐτὰ γὰρ ἔστιν ταῦτα these and no others, [Refs 5th c.BC+] himself alone, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; αὐτὸς μόνος, see at {μόνος} II; αὐτὸς καθ᾽ αὑτόν, see at {ἑαυτοῦ}. I.4) in Philosophy, by or in itself, of an abstract concept or idea, δίκαιον αὐτό[Refs 5th c.BC+] is frequently in this sense, attached to Nouns of all genders, οὐκ αὐτὸ δικαιοσύνην ἐπαινοῦντες ἀλλὰ τὰς ἀπ᾽ αὐτῆς εὐδοκιμήσεις[Refs 5th c.BC+]; more fully, εἰ αὐτὸ τοῦτο πατέρα ἠρώτων, ἆρα ὁ πατήρ ἐστι πατήρ τινος, ἢ ο; [Refs]; ἀδελφός, αὐτὸ τοῦτο ὅπερ ἔστιν the ideal, abstract brother, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; less frequently agreeing with the substantive, ἵνα αὐτὴ δικαιοσύνη πρὸς ἀδικίαν αὐτὴν κριθείη[Refs 5th c.BC+]its very self, [Refs] I.5) in dative with substantive, in one, together, ἀνόρουσεν αὐτῇ σὺν φόρμιγγι he sprang up lyre in hand, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; αὐτῇ σὺν πήληκι κάρη helmet and all,[Refs 8th c.BC+] men and all, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; αὐτοῖσι συμμάχοισι allies and all, [Refs 5th c.BC+] I.6) added to ordinal Numbers, e.g. πέμπτος αὐτός himself the fifth, i. e. himself with four others, [NT+5th c.BC+] I.7) frequently coupled with οὗτος, τοῦτ᾽ αὐτό ἐστι τὸ ζητηθέν[Refs 5th c.BC+]; ταῦτα ἥκω αὐτὰ ἵνα. [Refs 5th c.BC+] I.8) καὶ αὐτός himself too, [Refs 8th c.BC+] I.9) repeated in apodosi for emphasis, αὐτὸς ἐπαγγειλάμενος σώσειν. αὐτὸς ἀπώλεσεν[Refs 5th c.BC+] I.10) in connexion with the person. pronoun, ἐγὼν αὐτός[Refs 8th c.BC+]; followed by an enclitic pronoun, αὐτόν μιν[Refs 8th c.BC+] I.10.b) with person. pronoun omitted, αὐτός. ἧσθαι λιλαίομαι, for ἐγὼ αὐτός, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; αὐτὸν ἐλέησον, for ἐμὲ αὐτόν,[Refs 8th c.BC+] is simply a strengthened form of ο; and so in Attic dialect, when σὲ αὐτόν, ἐμοὶ αὐτῷ, etc, are read divisim, they are emphatic, not reflexive; in this case αὐτός generally precedes the person. pronoun,[Refs 5th c.BC+] I.10.c) with the reflexive ἑαυτοῦ, αὑτοῦ, etc, to add force and definiteness, αὐτὸς καθ᾽ αὑτοῦ[Refs 4th c.BC+]; αὐτοὶ ὑφ᾽ αὑτῶν[Refs 5th c.BC+]; sometimes between the Article and reflexive pronoun, τοῖς αὐτὸς αὑτοῦ πήμασιν βαρύνεται[Refs 5th c.BC+] I.10.d) αὐτοῦ, αὐτῶν with possessive pronoun, πατρὸς κλέος ἠδ᾽ ἐμὸν αὐτοῦ[Refs 8th c.BC+]; τοῖς οἷσιν αὐτοῦ[Refs 8th c.BC+] I.10.e) αὐτὸς ἑαυτοῦ with comparative and superlative adjective, αὐτὸς ἑωυτοῦ ῥέει πολλῷ ὑποδεέστερος[Refs 5th c.BC+] I.11) αὐτός for ὁ αὐτός, the same, [Refs 8th c.BC+], and in later Prose, αὐταῖς ταῖς ἡμέραις[NT+2nd c.AD+] I.12) comparative αὐτότερος[Refs 5th c.BC+]: superlative αὐτότατος his very self, [Refs 5th c.BC+]. adverb, comparative αὐτοτέρως[Refs 2nd c.AD+] II) he, she, it, for the simple pronoun of 3 person, only in oblique cases (except in later Gk, [NT], and rarely first in a sentence, [NT+5th c.BC+]: rare in Epic dialect, [Refs 8th c.BC+], and mostly emphatic,[Refs 8th c.BC+]; so in Trag, [Refs 5th c.BC+]: in Prose, to recall a Noun used earlier in the sentence, ἐγὼ μὲν οὖν βασιλέα. οὐκ οἶδα ὅ τι δεῖ αὐτὸν ὀμόσαι[Refs 5th c.BC+]; after a Relative, ὅς κε θεοῖς ἐπιπείθηται. ἔκλυον αὐτοῦ[Refs 8th c.BC+]; especially where a second Verb requires a change of case in the pronoun, οἳ ἂν ἐξελεγχθῶσι. ὡς προδότας αὐτοὺς ὄντας τιμωρηθῆναι[Refs 5th c.BC+]; later, pleonastically after a Relative, ὧν ὁ μὲν αὐτῶν[NT+5th c.BC+] III) with Article ὁ αὐτός, ἡ αὐτή, τὸ αὐτό, and Attic dialect contraction αὑτός, αὑτή, ταὐτό and ταὐτόν (as required by the metre,[Refs 5th c.BC+] plural neuter ταὐτ; Ionic dialect ὡυτός, τὠυτό:—the very one, the same, rare in [Refs 8th c.BC+]: with dative, to denote sameness or agreement, especially in Prose, τὠυτὸ ἂν ὑμῖν ἐπρήσσομεν[Refs 5th c.BC+]; ὁ αὐτὸς τῷ λίθῳ the same as the stone, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἐν ταὐτῷ εἶναί τινι to be in the place with, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; προσίεσθαί τινα ἐς ταὐτὸ ἑαυτῷ to have a person meet one,[Refs 5th c.BC+]face to face, [Refs 4th c.AD+] III.2) in later Greek, the said, the above-named, Ἡρώδης ὁ αὐ.[Refs 3rd c.BC+] IV) Adverbial phrases: IV.1) αὐτὸ μόνον simply, merely, [Refs 1st c.AD+] IV.2) αὐτό as adverb, ={ἄρτι}, [Refs] IV.3) αὐτὸ τοῦτο as adverb, [NT+2nd c.BC+] IV.4) with Preps, ἐπὶ τὸ αὐτό added together, making a total, [Refs 2nd c.AD+]; κατὰ τὸ αὐτό together, at the same time,[NT], etc; but κατ᾽ αὐτό just then, [Refs 2nd c.AD+] V) In Compos: V.1) of or by oneself, self-, as in αὐτοδίδακτος, αὐτογνώμων, αὐτόματος: and so, independently, as in αὐτοκράτωρ, αὐτόνομος. V.2) hence, as a second self, very, bodily, as with proper names, Αὐτοθαΐς. V.3) in the abstract, the ideal, see above[Refs] V.4) precisely, as in αὐτόδεκα. V.5) rarely with reflexive sense of ἀλλήλων, as in αὐτοκτονέω. V.6) in one piece with, together with, as in αὐτόκωπος, αὐτοχείλης, αὐτόπρεμνος, αὐτόρριζος. V.7) by itself: hence, only, as in αὐτόξυλος, αὐτόποκος.—For αὐτοῦ, αὐτῶς, etc, see the respective Arts.
Strongs
Word:
αὐτός
Transliteration:
autós
Pronounciation:
ow-tos'
Language:
Greek
Definition:
the reflexive pronoun self, used (alone or in the comparative g1438 (ἑαυτοῦ)) of the third person , and (with the proper personal pronoun) of the other persons; her, it(-self), one, the other, (mine) own, said, (self-), the) same, ((him-, my-, thy- )self, (your-)selves, she, that, their(-s), them(-selves), there(-at, - by, -in, -into, -of, -on, -with), they, (these) things, this (man), those, together, very, which; from the particle (perhaps akin to the base of g109 (ἀήρ) through the idea of a baffling wind) (backward)
only
Strongs:
Greek:
εἰ
Transliteration:
ei
Context:
Next word
Gloss:
if
Morphhology:
Conjunction
Grammar:
a conditional
Source:
Identical in King James sources, absent in Nestle/Aland and other sources
Additional:
if, if/whether
Tyndale
Word:
εἰ
Transliteration:
ei
Gloss:
if
Morphhology:
Greek Conditional
Definition:
εἰ, conjunctive particle, used in conditions and in indirect questions. I. Conditional, if; 1) with indic, expressing a general assumption; (a) pres: before indic, pres, Mat.11:14, Rom.8:25, al; before imperat, Mrk.4:23 9:22, Jhn.15:18, 1Co.7:9, al; before fut. indic, Luk.16:31, Rom.8:11, al; before pf. or aor, with negation in apodosis, Mat.12:26, Rom.4:14, al; similarly, before impf, Luk.17:6, Jhn.8:39; before quæst, Mat.6:23, Jhn.5:47 7:23 8:46, 1Pe.2:20; (b) fut: Mat.26:33, 1Pe.2:20; (with) pf: Jhn.11:12, Rom.6:5, al; (d) aor: Luk.16:11 19:8, Jhn.13:32, 18:23, Rev.20:15, al. 2) Where the assumption is certain = ἐπεί: Mat.12:28, Jhn.7:4, Rom.5:17, al. 3) Of an unfulfilled condition, with indic, impf, aor. or plpf, before ἄν, with imp. or aor. (see: ἄν, I, i). 4) C. indic, after verbs denoting wonder, etc, sometimes, but not always, coupled with an element of doubt: Mrk.15:44, 1Jn.3:13, al. 5) C. indic, as in LXX (Num.14:3 o, 1Ki.14:45, al. = Heb. אִם), in oaths, with the formula of imprecation understood in a suppressed apodosis (WM, 627; Burton, §272): Mrk.8:12, Heb.3:11 " (LXX) 4:3 (LXX). 6) Rarely (cl.) with optative, to express a merely possible condition: Act.24:19 27:39, 1Co.14:10 15:37, I Pe3:14, 17. II. Interrogative, if, whether. 1) As in cl, in indir. questions after verbs of seeing, asking, knowing, saying, etc: with indic. pres, Mat.26:63, Mrk.15:36, Act.19:2, 2Co.13:5, al; fut, Mrk.3:2, Act.8:22, al; aor, Mrk.15:44, 1Co.1:16, al; with subjc. aor. (M, Pr., 194), Php.3:12. 2) As in LXX (= Heb. אִם and interrog. הֲ, Gen.17:17, al; see WM, 639f; Viteau, i, 22), in direct questions: Mrk.8:23 (Tr, WH, txt.), Luk.13:23, 22:49, Act.19:2, al. III. With other particles. 1) εἰ ἄρα, εἴγε, εἰ δὲ μήγε, see: ἄρα, γε. 2) εἰ δὲ καί, but if also: Luk.11:18; but even if, 1Co.4:7, 2Co.4:3 11:16. 3) εἰ δὲ μή, but if not, but if otherwise: Mrk.2:21, 22 Jhn.14:2, Rev.2:5, al. 4) εἰ καί, if even, if also, although: Mrk.14:29, Luk.11:8, 1Co.7:21, 2Co.4:16, Php.2:17, al. 5) καὶ εἰ, even if, see: καί 6) εἰ μή, if not, unless, except, but only: Mat.24:22, Mrk.2:26 6:5, Jhn.9:33, 1Co.7:17 (only), Gal.1:19 (cf. ἐὰν μή, 2:16; see Hort, Ja., xvi); ἐκτὸς εἰ μή, pleonastic (Bl, §65, 6), 1Co.14:5 15:2, 1Ti.5:19. 7) εἰ μήν = cl. ἦ μήν (M, Pr., 46), in oaths, surely (Eze.33:27, al.): Heb.6:14. 8) εἴ πως, if haply: Act.27:12, Rom.1:10. 9) εἴτε. εἴτε, whether. or; Rom.12:6-8, 1Co.3:22 13:8, al. (AS)
Liddell-Scott-Jones
Word:
εἰ
Transliteration:
ei
Gloss:
if
Morphhology:
Greek Conditional
Definition:
εἰ, Attic dialect-Ionic dialect and [Refs 4th c.AD+] ἤ [Refs] in Epic dialect:— Particle used interjectionally with imperative and to express a wish, but usually either in conditions, if, or in indirect questions, whether. In the former use its regular negative is μ; in the latter, οὐ. A) INTERJECTIONALLY, in [Refs 8th c.BC+], come now! with imperative, εἰ δὲ. ἄκουσον [Refs 8th c.BC+] A.2) in wishes, with optative, ἀλλ᾽ εἴ τις. καλέσειεν [Refs]; so later, εἴ μοι ξυνείη μοῖρα [Refs 8th c.BC+]; of unattained wishes, in [Refs 8th c.BC+]; later with past tenses of indicative, εἰ γάρ μ᾽ ὑπὸ γῆν. ἧκεν [Refs 4th c.BC+]; εἰ γὰρ τοσαύτην δύναμιν εἶχον ὥστε. [Refs 8th c.BC+]infinitive (compare the use of infinitive in commands), αἰ γὰρ τοῖος ἐὼν. ἐμὸς γαμβρὸς καλέεσθαι [Refs] A.2.b) εἴθε, Epic dialect αἴθε, is frequently used in wishes in the above constructions, εἴθε οἱ αὐτῷ Ζεὺς ἀγαθὸν τελέσειεν [Refs 8th c.BC+]: later with infinitive, γαίης χθαμαλωτέρη εἴθε. κεῖσθαι [Refs 1st c.BC+] A.2.c) εἰ γάρ, εἴθε are also used with ὤφελον (Epic dialect ὤφελλον), of past unattained wishes, αἴθ᾽ ὤφελλες στρατοῦ ἄλλου σημαίνειν [Refs 8th c.BC+]; εἰ γὰρ ὤφελον [κατιδεῖν] [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.2.d) followed by a clause expressing a consequence of the fulfilment of the wish, αἰ γὰρ τοῦτο. ἔπος τετελεσμένον εἴη· τῷ κε τάχα γνοίης. [Refs 8th c.BC+]; sometimes hard to distinguish from εἰ in conditions (which may be derived from this use), εἴ μοί τι πίθοιο, τό κεν πολὺ κέρδιον εἴη [Refs 8th c.BC+] B) IN CONDITIONS, if: B.I) with INDIC, B.I.1) with all tenses (for future, see below [Refs]if this is so, it will be, [Refs 8th c.BC+]: any form of the Verb may stand in apodosi, εἰ θεοί τι δρῶσιν αἰσχρόν, οὐκ εἰσὶν θεοί [Refs 8th c.BC+]; εἰ οὗτοι ὀρθῶς ἀπέστησαν, ὑμεῖς ἂν οὐ χρεὼν ἄρχοιτε if these were right in their revolt, (it would follow that) you rule when you have no right, [Refs 5th c.BC+] B.I.1.b) to express a general condition, if ever, whenever, sometimes with present, εἴ τις δύο ἢ καὶ πλείους τις ἡμέρας λογίζεται, μάταιός ἐστιν [Refs 5th c.BC+]: with imperfect, εἴ τίς τι ἠρώτα ἀπεκρίνοντο [Refs 5th c.BC+]: rarely with aorist, [Refs 1st c.BC+] B.I.2) with future (much less frequently than ἐάν with subjunctive), either to express a future supposition emphatically, εἰ φθάσομεν τοὺς πολεμίους κατακαίνοντες οὐδεὶς ἡμῶν ἀποθανεῖται [Refs 5th c.BC+] in threats or warnings, εἰ μὴ καθέξεις γλῶσσαν ἔσται σοι κακά [Refs 5th c.BC+] B.I.2.b) to express a present intention or expectation, αἶρε πλῆκτρον εἰ μαχεῖ if you mean to fight, [Refs 8th c.BC+] B.I.3) with historical tenses, implying that the condition is or was unfulfilled. B.I.3.a) with imperfect, referring to present time or to continued or repeated action in past time (in [Refs 8th c.BC+], if they did not live an abstemious life, [Refs 5th c.BC+] would not have been master of islands, if he had not had also some naval force, [Refs 7th c.BC+]; εἰ ἦσαν ἄνδρες ἀγαθοὶ. οὐκ ἄν ποτε ταῦτα ἔπασχον if they had been good men, they would never have suffered as they did, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; εἰ γὰρ ἐγὼ τάδε ᾔδἐ. οὐκ ἂν ὑπεξέφυγε if I had known this, [Refs 8th c.BC+] B.I.3.b) with aorist referring to past time, εἰ μὴ ἔφυσε θεὸς μέλι. ἔφασκον γλύσσονα σῦκα πέλεσθαι [Refs 6th c.BC+]; εἰ μὴ ὑμεῖς ἤλθετε, ἐπορευόμεθα ἂν ἐπὶ βασιλέα had you not come, we should be on our way, [Refs 8th c.BC+]: with pluperfect in apodosi, εἰ τριάκοντα μόναι μετέπεσον τῶν ψήφων, ἀπεπεφεύγη ἄν [Refs 5th c.BC+] B.I.3.c) rarely with pluperfect referring to action finished in past or present time, λοιπὸν δ᾽ ἂν ἦν ἡμῖν ἔτι περὶ τῆς πόλεως διαλεχθῆναι, εἰ μὴ προτέρα τῶν ἄλλων τὴν εἰρήνην ἐπεποίητο if she had not (as she has done) made peace before the rest, [Refs 5th c.BC+] B.II) with SUB[Refs 1st c.AD+] (Epic dialect κε, κεν), compare ἐάν: [Refs 4th c.BC+]; but ἄν (κε, κεν) are frequently absent in [Refs 8th c.BC+], cf. Foed.Doric dialect cited in [Refs 5th c.BC+]; occasionally in Trag, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; very rarely in Attic dialect Prose, εἰ ξυστῶσιν αἱ πόλεις [Refs 5th c.BC+]: in later Prose, εἴ τις θελήσῃ [NT+3rd c.AD+] B.II.1) when the apodosis is future, to express a future condition more distinctly and vividly than εἰ with optative, but less so than εἰ with future indicative (above [Refs]; εἰ δέ κεν ὣς ἕρξῃς καί τοι πείθωνται Ἀχαιοί, γνώσῃ ἔπειθ᾽. if thou do thus, thou shalt know, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ἂν μὴ νῦν ἐθέλωμεν ἐκεῖ πολεμεῖν αὐτῷ, ἐνθάδ᾽ ἴσως ἀναγκασθησόμεθα τοῦτο ποιεῖν if we be not now willing, [Refs 5th c.BC+] B.II.2) when the apodosis is present, denoting customary or repeated action, to express a general condition, if ever, ἤν ποτε δασμὸς ἵκηται, σοὶ τὸ γέρας πολὺ μεῖζον (i.e. ἐστί) whenever a division comes, your prize is (always) greater, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ἢν ἐγγὺς ἔλθῃ θάνατος, οὐδεὶς βούλεται θνῄσκειν if death come near, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; with ἄν omitted, εἴ περ γάρ τε χόλον. καταπέψῃ ἀλλά. ἔχει κότον [Refs 8th c.BC+] B.II.2.b) with Rhet. present in apodosis, ἐὰν μὴ οἱ φιλόσοφοι βασιλεύσωσιν, οὐκ ἔστι κακῶν παῦλα there is (i.e. can be, will be) no rest, [Refs 5th c.BC+] B.III) with OPTATIVE (never with ἄν in early Gr, later ἐάν with optative, [Refs 5th c.AD+] B.III.1) to express a future condition less definitely than ἐάν with subjunctive, usually with optative with ἄν in apodosis, ἦ κεν γηθήσαι Πρίαμος Πριάμοιό τε παῖδες. εἰ σφῶιν τάδε πάντα πυθοίατο μαρναμένοιιν surely they would exult, if they should hear, [Refs 8th c.BC+]: future optative is falsa lectio in [Refs 5th c.BC+]: with present indicative in apodosis, [Refs 6th c.BC+]: with future indicative, [Refs 5th c.BC+] B.III.1.b) in Hom.sometimes with present optative, to express an unfulfilled present condition, εἰ μὲν νῦν ἐπὶ ἄλλῳ ἀεθλεύοιμεν, ἦ τ᾽ ἂν ἐγὼ τὰ πρῶτα φεροίμην if we were now contending, etc, [Refs 8th c.BC+] B.III.2) when the apodosis is past, denoting customary or repeated action, to express a general condition in past time (corresponding to use of subjunctive in present time, above [Refs]; once in [Refs 8th c.BC+]; εἰ δέ τινας θορυβουμένους αἴσθοιτο, κατασβεννύναι τὴν ταραχὴν ἐπειρᾶτο if he should see (whenever he saw) any troops in confusion, he (always) tried, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; εἴ τις ἀντείποι, εὐθὺς ἐτεθνήκει if any one made objection, he was a dead man at once, [Refs 5th c.BC+]: indicative and optative are found in same sentence, ἐμίσει, οὐκ εἴ τις κακῶς πάσχων ἠμύνετο, ἀλλ᾽ εἴ τις εὐεργετούμενος ἀχάριστος φαίνοιτο [Refs 5th c.BC+] B.III.3) in oratio obliqua after past tenses, representing ἐάν with subjunctive or εἰ with a primary (never an historical) tense of the indicative in oratio recta, ἐλογίζοντο ὡς, εἰ μὴ μάχοιντο, ἀποστήσοιντο αἱ πόλεις (representing ἐὰν μὴ μαχώμεθα, ἀποστήσονται) [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἔλεγεν ὅτι, εἰ βλαβερὰ πεπραχὼς εἴη, δίκαιος εἴη ζημιοῦσθαι (representing εἰ βλαβερὰ πέπραχε, δίκαιός ἐστι)[Refs]; εἰ δέ τινα φεύγοντα λήψοιτο, προηγόρευεν ὅτι ὡς πολεμίῳ χρήσοιτο (representing εἴ τινα λήψομαι, χρήσομαι) [Refs]; also, where oratio obliqua is implied in the leading clause, οὐκ ἦν τοῦ πολέμου πέρας Φιλίππῳ, εἰ μὴ Θηβαίους. ἐχθροὺς ποιήσειε τῇ πόλει, i.e. Philip thought there would be no end to the war, unless he should make. (his thought having been ἐὰν μὴ ποιήσω), [Refs 5th c.BC+] B.III.4) with optative with ἄν, only when the clause serves as apodosis as well as protasis,[Refs 5th c.BC+] B.IV) with infinitive, in oratio obliqua, only in [Refs 5th c.BC+] B.V) after Verbs denoting wonder, delight, indignation, disappointment, contentment, and similar emotions, εἰ with indicative is used instead of ὅτι, to express the object of the feeling in a hypothetical form, θαυμάζω εἰ μηδεὶς ὑμῶν μήτ᾽ ἐνθυμεῖται μήτ᾽ ὀργίζεται, ὁρῶν. I wonder that no one of you is either concerned or angry when he sees, [Refs 4th c.BC+]: after past tenses, ἐθαύμασε δ᾽ εἰ μὴ φανερόν ἐστιν [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἐθαύμαζε δ᾽ εἴ τις ἀρετὴν ἐπαγγελλόμενος ἀργύριον πράττοιτο he wondered that any one should demand money, [Refs]; ἔχαιρον ἀγαπῶν εἴ τις ἐάσοι I rejoiced, being content if any one should let it pass, [Refs 5th c.BC+] —in this use the _negative_ οὐ is also found, ἀγανακτῶ εἰ ὁ Φίλιππος ἁρπάζων οὐ λυπεῖ [Refs 5th c.BC+] B.VI) in citing a fact as a ground of argument or appeal, as surely as, since, εἴ ποτ᾽ ἔην γε if there was [as there was], i.e. as sure as there was such an one, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; πολλοὺς γὰρ οἶκε εἶναι εὐπετέστερον διαβάλλειν ἢ ἕνα, εἰ Κλεομένεα μὲν μοῦνον οὐκ οἷός τε ἐγένετο διαβαλεῖν, τρεῖς δὲ μυριάδας Ἀθηναίων ἐποίησε τοῦτο it seems easier to deceive many than one, if (as was the fact, i.e. since) he was not able, [Refs 5th c.BC+] B.VII) ELLIPTICAL CONSTRUCTIONS: B.VII.1) with apodosis implied in the context, εἰ having the force of in case, supposing that, πρὸς τὴν πόλιν, εἰ ἐπιβοηθοῖεν, ἐχώρουν they marched towards the city [so as to meet the citizens], in case they should rush out, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἱκέται πρὸς σὲ δεῦρ᾽ ἀφίγμεθα, εἴ τινα πόλιν φράσειας ἡμῖν εὔερον we have come hither to you, in case you should tell us of some fleecy city (i.e. that we might hear of it), [Refs 5th c.BC+]; παρέζεο καὶ λαβὲ γούνων, αἴ κέν πως ἐθέλῃσιν ἐπὶ Τρώεσσιν ἀρῆξαι sit by him and grasp his knees [so as to persuade him], in case he be willing to help the Trojans, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ἄκουσον καὶ ἐμοῦ, ἐάν σοι ἔτι ταὐτὰ δοκῇ hear me also [that you may assent], in case the same opinion please you, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἰδὲ δή, ἐάν σοι ὅπερ ἐμοὶ συνδοκῇ look now, in case you approve what I do, [Refs] B.VII.2) with apodosis suppressed for rhetorical reasons, εἴ περ γάρ κ᾽ ἐθέλῃσιν Ὀλύμπιος. στυφελίξαι if he wish to thrust him away, [he will do so], [Refs 8th c.BC+]; εἰ μὲν δώσουσι γέρας—· εἰ δέ κε μὴ δώωσιν, ἐγὼ δέ κεν αὐτὸς ἕλωμαι if they shall give me a prize, [well and good]; but if they give not, then I will take one for myself, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; καὶ ἢν μὲν ξυμβῇ ἡ πεῖρα—· εἰ δὲ μή. and if the attempt succeed, [well]; otherwise, [Refs 5th c.BC+] B.VII.3) with the Verb of the protasis omitted, chiefly in the following expressions: B.VII.3.a) εἰ μή except, οὐδὲν ἄλλο σιτέονται, εἰ μὴ ἰχθῦς μοῦνον [Refs 5th c.BC+]; μὰ τὼ θεώ, εἰ μὴ Κρίτυλλά γ᾽ [εἰμί]—nay, if I'm not Critylla! i.e. I am, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; εἰ μὴ ὅσον except only, ἐγὼ μέν μιν οὐκ εἶδον, εἰ μὴ ὅσον γραφῇ [Refs 5th c.BC+]; εἰ μή τι οὖν, ἀλλὰ σμικρόν γέ μοι τῆς ἀρχῆς χάλασον if nothing else, yet, [Refs 5th c.BC+] B.VII.3.b) εἰ δὲ μή but if not, i.e. otherwise, προηγόρευε τοῖς Λαμψακηνοῖσι μετιέναι Μιλτιάδεα, εἰ δὲ μή, σφέας πίτυος τρόπον ἀπείλεε ἐκτρίψειν [Refs 5th c.BC+]; after μάλιστα μέν, [Refs 5th c.BC+] —after a preceding _negative_, μὴ τύπτ᾽· εἰ δὲ μή, σαυτόν ποτ᾽ αἰτιάσει don't beat me; otherwise, you will have yourself to blame, [Refs 5th c.BC+] B.VII.3.c) εἰ δέ sometimes stands for εἰ δὲ μή, εἰ μὲν βούλεται, ἑψέτω· εἰ δ᾽, ὅτι βούλεται, τοῦτο ποιείτω [Refs 5th c.BC+]; εἰ δὲ τοῦτο and if so, [Refs 1st c.BC+] B.VII.3.d) εἰ γάρ for if so, [Refs] B.VII.3.e) εἴ τις if any, i. e. as much as or more than any, τῶν γε νῦν αἴ τις ἐπιχθονίων, ὀρθῶς [Refs 5th c.BC+]; εἴ τις ἄλλος, siquis alius, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; also κατ᾽ εἰ δέ τινα τρόπον in any way, [Refs] B.VII.3.f) εἴ ποτε or εἴπερ ποτέ now if ever, ἡμῖν δὲ καλῶς, εἴπερ ποτέ, ἔχει. ἡ ξυναλλαγή [Refs 7th c.BC+]; but in prayers, εἴ ποτέ τοι ἐπὶ νηὸν ἔρεψα. τόδε μοι κρήηνον ἐέλδωρ [Refs 8th c.BC+] B.VII.3.g) εἴ ποθεν (i.e. δυνατόν ἐστι) if from any quarter, i.e. from some quarter or other, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; so εἴ ποθι somewhere, anywhere, [Refs 8th c.BC+] B.VII.3.h) εἴ πως[Refs 5th c.BC+]: in an elliptical sentence (cf. VII. [Refs 5th c.BC+] B.VIII) with other PARTICLES: B.VIII.1) for the distinction between καὶ εἰ (or καὶ ἐάν, or κἄν) even if, and εἰ καί (or ἐὰν καί) even though, see at {καί}:—the opposite of καὶ εἰ is οὐδ᾽ εἰ, not even if; that of εἰ καί is εἰ μηδέ, if (although) not even. B.VIII.2) for ὡς εἰ, ὡς εἴ τε, ὥσπερ εἰ, etc, see at {ὡς} and ὥσπερ. B.VIII.3) for εἰ ἄρα, see at {ἄρα}; for εἰ δή, εἴπερ, see at {εἰ δή, εἴπερ}; for εἴ γε, see at {γέ}. B.IX) in negative oaths, = Hebrew im, [LXX+NT] C) IN INDIRECT QUESTIONS, whether, followed by the indicative, subjunctive, or optative, according to the principles of oratio obliqua: C.1) with IN[Refs 4th c.BC+] whether he is a god, [Refs 8th c.BC+] C.2) with SUB[Refs 1st c.AD+]subjunctive in the direct question, τὰ ἐκπώματα οὐκ οἶδ᾽ εἰ Χρυσάντᾳ τουτῳῒ δῶ whether I should give them, [Refs 5th c.BC+] C.3) OPT. after past tenses, representing either of the two previous constructions in the direct question, ἤρετο εἴ τις ἐμοῦ εἴη σοφώτερος he asked whether any one was wiser than I (direct ἔστι τις σοφώτερο;), [Refs 5th c.BC+]aorist optative for the aorist indicative, ἠρώτων αὐτὸν εἰ ἀναπλεύσειεν I asked him whether he had set sail (direct ἀνέπλευσα;), [Refs 4th c.BC+]aorist optative usually represents aorist subjunctive, τὸν θεὸν ἐπήροντο εἰ παραδοῖεν Κορινθίοις τὴν πόλιν. καὶ τιμωρίαν τινὰ πειρῷντ᾽ ἀπ᾽ αὐτῶν ποιεῖσθαι they asked whether they should deliver their city to the Corinthians, and should try, [Refs 5th c.BC+] —in both constructions the _indicative_ or subjunctive may be retained, ψῆφον ἐβούλοντο ἐπαγαγεῖν εἰ χρὴ πολεμεῖν[Refs]; ἐβουλεύοντο εἴτε κατακαύσωσιν. εἴτε τι ἄλλο χρήσωνται whether they should burn them or should dispose of them in some other way, [Refs]; ἀνακοινοῦσθαι αὐτὸν αὑτῷ εἰ δῷ ἐπιψηφίσαι τοῖς προέδροις [he said that] he consulted him whether he should give, [Refs 4th c.BC+] C.4) with OPT. and ἄν when this was the form of the direct question, ἠρώτων εἰ δοῖεν ἂν τούτων τὰ πιστά they asked whether they would give (direct δοιήτε ἄ;), [Refs 5th c.BC+] C.5) the NEG. used with εἰ in indirect questions is οὐ, when οὐ would be used in the direct question, ἐνετέλλετο. εἰρωτᾶν εἰ οὔ τι ἐπαισχύνεται whether he is not ashamed, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; but if μή would be required in the direct form, it is retained in the indirect, οὐ τοῦτο ἐρωτῶ, ἀλλ᾽ εἰ τοῦ μὲν δικαίου μὴ ἀξιοῖ πλέον ἔχειν μηδὲ βούλεται ὁ δίκαιος, τοῦ δὲ ἀδίκου (the direct question would be μὴ ἀξιοῖ μηδὲ βούλετα; he does not see fit nor wish, does he?) [Refs 5th c.BC+]:—in double indirect questions, εἴτε. εἴτε; εἰ. εἴτε; εἴτε. ἢ, either οὐ or μή can be used in the second clause, ὅπως ἴδῃς εἴτ᾽ ἔνδον εἴτ᾽ οὐκ ἔνδον [Refs 5th c.BC+]; εἰ ἀληθὲς ἢ μή, πειράσομαι μαθεῖν[Refs 4th c.BC+]; τοὺς νόμους καταμανθάνειν εἰ καλῶς κεῖνται ἢ μή. τοὺς λόγους εἰ ὀρθῶς ὑμᾶς διδάσκουσιν ἢ οὔ [Refs 5th c.BC+]
Strongs > g1487
Word:
εἰ
Transliteration:
ei
Pronounciation:
i
Language:
Greek
Morphhology:
Conjunction
Definition:
if, whether, that, etc.; forasmuch as, if, that, (al-)though, whether; a primary particle of conditionality
except
Strongs:
Lexicon:
μή
Greek:
μὴ
Transliteration:
mē
Context:
Next word
Gloss:
not
Morphhology:
Negative Particle Negative Negative
Grammar:
introducing a negative
Source:
Identical in King James sources, absent in Nestle/Aland and other sources
Tyndale
Word:
μή
Transliteration:
mē
Gloss:
not
Morphhology:
Greek Particle Neuter
Definition:
μή, subjective negative particle, used where the negation depends on a condition or hypothesis, expressed or understood, as distinct from οὐ, which denies absolutely. μή is used where one thinks a thing is not, as distinct from an absolute negation. As a general rule, οὐ negatives the indic, μή the other moods, incl, ptcp. [In LXX for אֵין,אַיִן,אַל] I. As a neg. adv, not; 1) with ref. to thought or opinion: Jhn.3:18, Tit.1:11, 2Pe.1:9. 2) In delib. questions, with subjc. (M, Pr., 185): Mrk.12:14, Rom.3:8. 3) In conditional and final sentences, after εἰ, ἐάν, ἄν, ἵνα, ὅπως: Mat.10:14, Mrk.6:11 12:19, Luk.9:5, Jhn.6:50, Rom.11:25, al. 4) C. inf. (see M, Pr., 234f, 239, 255), (a) after verbs of saying, etc: Mat.2:12 5:34, Mrk.12:18, Act.15:38, Rom.2:21, al; (b) with artic. inf: after a prep, Mat.13:5, Mrk.4:5, Act.7:19, 1Co.10:6, al; without a prep, Rom.14:13, 2Co.2:1, 13 1Th 4:6; (with) in sentences expressing consequence, after ὥστε: Mat.8:28, Mrk.3:20, 1Co.1:7, 2Co.3:7, al. 5) C. ptcp. (see M, Pr., 231f, 239), in hypothetical references to persons of a certain character or description: Mat.10:28 12:30, Luk.6:49, Jhn.3:18, Rom.4:5, 1Co.7:38, 1Jn.3:10, al; where the person or thing being definite, the denial is a matter of opinion: Jhn.6:64, 1Co.1:28 4:7, 18, 2Co.5:21, al; where the ptcp. has a concessive, causal or conditional force, if, though, because not: Mat.18:25, Luk.2:45, Jhn.7:49, Act.9:26, Rom.2:14 5:13, 2Co.3:14, Gal.6:9, Ju 5; where the ptcp. has a descriptive force (being such as), not: Act.9:9, Rom.1:28, 1Co.10:33, Gal.4:8, Heb.12:27, al. 6) μή prohibitive, in indep. sentences, (a) with subjc. praes, 1 of person(s) pl: Gal.5:26 6:9, 1Th.5:6, 1Jn.3:18; (b) with imperat. praes, usually where one is bidden to desist from what has already begun (cf. M, Pr., 122ff.): Mat.7:1, Mrk.5:36, Luk.6:30, Jhn.2:16 5:45, Act.10:15, Rom.11:18, Jas.2:1, Rev.5:5, al; (with) forbidding that which is still future: with imperat. aor, 3 of person(s), Mat.24:18, Mrk.13:15, Luk.17:31, al; with subjc. aor, 2 of person(s), Mat.3:9 10:26, Mrk.5:7, Luk.6:29, Jhn.3:7, Rom.10:6, al; (d) with optative, in wishes: 2Ti.4:16 (LXX); μὴ γένοιτο (see M, Pr., 194; Bl, §66, 1), Luk.20:16, Rom.3:3, al; μή τις, Mrk.13:5, al. II. As a conj, 1) after verbs of fearing, caution, etc, that, lest, perhaps (M, Pr., 192f.): with subjc. praes, Heb.12:15; with subjc. aor, Mat.24:4, Mrk.13:5, Luk.21:8, Act.13:40, Gal.5:15, al; ὅρα μή (see M, Pr., 124, 178), elliptically, Rev.19:10 22:9; with indic, fut. (M, Pr., l.with), Col.2:8. 2) in order that not: with subjc. aor, Mrk.13:36, 2Co.8:20 12:6. III. Interrogative, in hesitant questions (M, Pr., 170), or where a negative answer is expected: Mat.7:9, 10, Mrk.2:19, Jhn.3:4, Rom.3:3 10:18, 19, 1Co.1:13, al; μή τις, Luk.22:35, al; before οὐ (Rom.10:17, al. in Pl.), expecting an affirm, ans; οὐ μή, Luk.18:7, Jhn.18:11. IV. οὐ μή as emphatic negation (cf. M, Pr., 188, 190ff; Bl. §64, 5), not at all, by no means: with indic, fut, Mat.16:22, Jhn.6:35, Heb.10:17, al; with subjc. aor, Mat.24:2, Mrk.13:2, Luk.6:37, Jhn.13:8, 1Co.8:13, al. (AS)
Liddell-Scott-Jones
Word:
μή
Transliteration:
mē
Gloss:
not
Morphhology:
Greek Particle Neuter
Definition:
μή, Elean μά [ᾱ] [Refs 6th c.BC+]. (Cf. Sanskrit mā´, Armenian mi [from I.-[Refs 5th c.BC+] mē´], negative used in prohibitions):—not, the negative of the will and thought, as οὐ of fact and statement; μή rejects, οὐ denies; μή is relative, οὐ absolute; μή subjective, οὐ objective. (A few examples of μηδέ and μηδείς have been included.) A) in INDEPENDENT sentences, used in expressions of will or wish, command, entreaty, warning, A.1) with present imperative, 2 person, μή μ᾽ ἐρέθιζε [Refs 8th c.BC+]: rarely with aorist imperative, μὴ. ἔνθεο τιμῇ [Refs 8th c.BC+]; in Attic dialect, μὴ ψεῦσον, ὦ Ζεῦ, τῆς. ἐλπίδος [Refs 8th c.BC+]perfect imperative [Refs 8th c.BC+] person when perfect = present, μὴ κεκράγετε [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.2) with subjunctive (usually [Refs], in prohibitions, μὴ δή με. ἐάσῃς [Refs 8th c.BC+]; μή τοί με κρύψῃς τοῦτο[Refs 5th c.BC+]: coupled with present imperative, μὴ βοηθήσητε τῷ πεπονθότι δεινά, μὴ εὐορκεῖτε [Refs 8th c.BC+] person present subjunctive, μὴ κάμνῃς [Refs 5th c.BC+]: also with the hortative subjunctive used to supply the [Refs] person of the imperative, present μὴ ἴομεν [Refs 8th c.BC+]: aorist μὴ πάθωμεν [Refs 5th c.BC+]: rarely with 1st pers. singular, μή σε. κιχείω [Refs 8th c.BC+] (anapaest meter). A.2.b) with present or aorist subjunctive in a warning or statement of fear, μὴ. γένησθε take care you do not become, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; μὴ. ὑφαίνῃσιν I fear. may prove to be weaving, [Refs 8th c.BC+]: in Attic dialect Prose, to make a polite suggestion of apprehension or hesitation, perhaps, μὴ ἀγροικότερον ᾖ τὸ ἀληθὲς εἰπεῖν [Refs 5th c.BC+]: in later Greek the indicative is found, μὴ ἡ ἔννοια ἡμῶν. ἀντιλαμβάνεται [Refs 5th c.AD+] A.3) with future indicative, a uncertain usage (νεμεσήσετ᾽ is subjunctive in [Refs 8th c.BC+]; μὴ βουλήσεσθε (Papyrus βούλη[σθ]ε) [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.4) with past tenses of indicative to express an unfulfilled wish, μὴ ὄφελες λίσσεσθαι [Refs 8th c.BC+] A.5) with optative to express a negative wish, with present, ἃ μὴ κραίνοι τύχη [Refs 4th c.BC+]: more frequently with aorist, μὴ σέ γ᾽ ἐν ἀμφιάλῳ Ἰθάκῃ βασιλῆα Κρονίων ποιήσειεν [Refs 8th c.BC+] A.6) in oaths and asseverations, ἴστω Ζεὺς, μὴ μὲν τοῖς ἵπποισιν ἀνὴρ ἐποχήσεται ἄλλος [Refs 8th c.BC+] A.7) with infinitive, when used as imperative, μὴ δή μοι ἀπόπροθεν ἰσχέμεν ἵππους [Refs 8th c.BC+] A.8) frequently without a Verb, εἰ χρή, θανοῦμαι. Answ. μὴ σύ γε (i.e. θάνῃς) [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἄπελθε νῦν. Answ. μὴ (i.e. γενέσθω) ἀλλά nay but, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; in curt expressions, μὴ τριβὰς ἔτι (i.e. ποιεῖσθε) [Refs 5th c.BC+]; μή μοι σύ none of that to me! [Refs 5th c.BC+]; μή μοι πρόφασιν no excuses! [Refs 5th c.BC+] B) in DEPENDENT clauses: B.1) with Final Conjs, ἵνα μή [Refs 8th c.BC+], that so, ὅπως ἂν. μηδέ [Refs 8th c.BC+]; but B.1.b) μή alone, ={ἵνα μή}, lest, ἀπόστιχε μή τινοήσῃ Ἥρη [Refs 8th c.BC+]: future indicative and aorist subjunctive in consecutive clauses, [Refs 5th c.BC+] B.2) in the protasis of conditional sentences, see at {εἰ} (for the exceptions see at {οὐ}), and with temporal conjunctions used conditionally, see at {ἐπειδάν, ὅταν, ὅτε}, etc. B.2.b) ὅτι μή except, ὅτι μὴ Χῖοι μοῦνοι [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ὅσα μὴ ἀποβαίνοντες provided only that they did not disembark, [Refs 5th c.BC+] B.3) in later Gr, with causal Conjs, ὁ μὴ πιστεύων ἤδη κέκριται, ὅτι μὴ πεπίστευκεν [NT+2nd c.AD+] that, ὅτι μὴ ἐστὶν ἐπίπεδος οὕτως ἂν καταμάθοιμεν [Refs 2nd c.AD+] B.4) in relative clauses, which imply a condition or generality, ὃς δὲ μὴ εἶδέ κω τὴν κανναβίδα whoever, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ὃ μὴ κελεύσει (perhaps κελεύσαι) Ζεύς such a thing as, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; λέγονθ᾽ ἃ μὴ δεῖ such things as one ought not, [Refs 5th c.BC+]: frequently with subjunctive, ᾧ μὴ ἄλλοι ἀοσσητῆρες ἔωσιν [Refs 8th c.BC+] B.5) with infinitive, B.5.a) regularlyfrom Homer on, except after Verbs of saying and thinking (but see below c): after ὥστε or ὡς, ὥστε μὴ φρονεῖν [Refs 4th c.BC+]: always when the infinitive takes the Article, τὸ μὴ προμαθεῖν [Refs 5th c.BC+] B.5.b) by an apparent pleonasm after Verbs of negative result signifying to forbid, deny, and the like, ὁ δ᾽ ἀναίνετο μηδὲν ἑλέσθαι [Refs 8th c.BC+] (μηδέν); ἀντιλέγειν [Refs 5th c.BC+] (μηδέ); ἀπαγορεύειν [Refs 5th c.BC+] (μηδέ); ἀποτρέπεσθαι [Refs] (μηδέν); ἀρνεῖσθαι, ἔξαρνος εἶναι, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; παύειν (where the participle is more frequently) [Refs 5th c.BC+]: in these cases the Article frequently precedes μή, τὸ δὲ μὴ λεηλατῆσαι. ἔσχε τόδε [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἐξομῇ τὸ μὴ εἰδένα; [Refs 5th c.BC+]; εἴργειν τὸ μή. [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἐμποδὼν γίγνεσθαι τοῦ μή. [Refs] B.5.c) after Verbs of saying and thinking which involve an action of will, as in those signifying to swear, aver, believe, and the like; so after ὄμνυμι, [Refs 8th c.BC+]: occasionally with other Verbs, φημί [Refs 5th c.BC+]; λέγω, προλέγω, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; πάντες ἐροῦσι μή. [Refs 5th c.BC+]; νομίζω[Refs 5th c.BC+]: very frequently in later Gr, [Refs 5th c.BC+] B.6) with the participle, when it can be resolved into a conditional clause, μὴ ἐνείκας, = {εἰ μὴ ἤνεικε}, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; μὴ θέλων, ={εἰ μὴ θέλεις}, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; μὴ δολώσαντος θεοῦ, ={εἰ μὴ ἐδόλωσε}, [Refs]; μὴ δρῶν, ={εἰ μὴ δρῴην}, [Refs 5th c.BC+], = ut qui nihil sciam, [Refs]; τίς πρὸς ἀνδρὸς μὴ βλέποντος ἄρκεσι; one who sees not, [Refs]: in this signification frequently with the Article, ὁ μὴ λεύσσων [Refs 5th c.BC+]: with causal significance, μὴ παρὼν θαυμάζεται [Refs 5th c.BC+]: very frequently in later Greek, [Refs 1st c.AD+]: occasionally after Verbs of knowing and showing, [Refs 5th c.BC+] B.7) with Substantives, adjectives, and adverbs used generically, with or without Article, τὰ μὴ δίκαια [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἡ μὴ 'μπειρία, ={τὸ μὴ ἔχειν ἐμπειρίαν}, want of experience, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; δῆμον καὶ μὴ δῆμον[Refs 4th c.BC+] B.8) after Verbs expressing fear or apprehension (compare μὴ οὐ): B.8.a) when the thing feared is future, mostly with subjunctive: with present subjunctive, δεινῶς ἀθυμῶ μὴ βλέπων ὁ μάντις ᾖ shall proveto be, [Refs 5th c.BC+]: more frequently with aorist, δείδοικα. μή σε παρείπῃ [Refs 8th c.BC+]: with perfect, shall prove to have been, δέδοικα μὴ περαιτέρω πεπραγμέν᾽ ᾖ μοι [Refs 5th c.BC+]: less frequently with future indicative, [Refs 5th c.BC+]: with optative according to the sequence of moods and tenses: present optative, [Refs 5th c.BC+]: aorist, [Refs 8th c.BC+]: perfect, [Refs 5th c.BC+]: with future optative in oratio obliqua, [Refs 5th c.BC+]vect.4.41. B.8.b) when the action is present or past, the indicative is used, εἰσόρα μὴ σκῆψιν οὐκ οὖσαν τίθης [Refs 8th c.BC+] B.8.c) with indicative and subjunctive in consecutive clauses, [Refs 5th c.BC+] C) in QUESTIONS: C.I) direct questions, C.I.1) with indicative, where aneg. answer is anticipated (but more generally in [Refs 8th c.BC+]; μή σοι δοκοῦμεν; [Refs 5th c.BC+] (μηδέ) follows οὐ, see at {οὐ μή}. C.I.1.b) in other questions, τί μὴ ποιήσ; what am I not to do? [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τί μ; why not? [Refs]; compare μήν C.I.2) with subjunctive, when the speaker deliberates about a negative action, μὴ οὕτω φῶμε; [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ὁ τοιοῦτος μὴ δῷ δίκη; [Refs 4th c.BC+]; πῶς μὴ φῶμε; [Refs 5th c.BC+]; how can a man help being excited when he speaks? [Refs 5th c.BC+] C.II) indirect questions, frequently with Verbs implying fear and apprehension [Refs 8th c.BC+]; also σκοπεῖσθαι πῶς ἂν μή. [Refs 5th c.BC+]; later in simple indirect questions, ἐπυνθάνετο μὴ ἔγνω [Refs 2nd c.AD+] C.II.2) in questions introduced by εἰ, ἤρετό με. εἰ μὴ μέμνημαι [Refs 5th c.BC+]; εἴτε. εἴτε μή, εἰ. ἢ οὔ, εἰ. ἢ μή without difference of meaning between μή and οὐ, [Refs 5th c.BC+] D) POSITION of μή. When the negative extends its power over the whole clause, μή properly precedes the Verb. When its force is limited to single words, it precedes those words. But Poets sometimes put μή after the Verb, ὄλοιο μή πω [Refs 5th c.BC+]; φράσῃς. μὴ πέρα[Refs] D.2) μή is sometimes repeated, μή, μή καλέσῃς [Refs 5th c.BC+] E) PROSODY: in Trag. μή may be joined by synizesis with a following ει or ου, μὴ οὐ, μὴ εἰδέναι, [Refs 5th c.BC+]: initial ε after μή is cut off by aphaeresis, μὴ 'πὁθουν [Refs] followed by α is sometimes written μἀ. (see. μὴ ἀλλά, etc.); sometimes separately, μὴ ἀδικεῖν [Refs 4th c.BC+] F) μή in COMPOSITION (joined with other words), as μὴ ἀλλά, μὴ γάρ, μὴ οὐ, μὴ ὅπως or ὅτι, μή ποτε, etc, will be found in alphabetical order.
Strongs
Word:
μή
Transliteration:
mḗ
Pronounciation:
may
Language:
Greek
Definition:
(adverb) not, (conjunction) lest; also (as an interrogative implying a negative answer (whereas g3756 (οὐ) expects an affirmative one)) whether; any but (that), X forbear, + God forbid, + lack, lest, neither, never, no (X wise in), none, nor, (can-)not, nothing, that not, un(-taken), without; a primary particle of qualified negation (whereas g3756 (οὐ) expresses an absolute denial)
to keep from
Strongs:
Lexicon:
φυλάσσω
Greek:
φυλάσσεσθαι
Transliteration:
phulassesthai
Context:
Next word
Gloss:
to keep/guard
Morphhology:
Verb Present Middle or Passive Infinitive
Grammar:
an ACTION that is to be done
Source:
Identical in all sources
Additional:
to keep/guard, protect
Tyndale
Word:
φυλάσσω
Origin:
a Meaning of g5442G
Transliteration:
phulassō
Gloss:
to keep/guard: protect
Morphhology:
Greek Verb
Definition:
φυλάσσω [in LXX chiefly and very frequently for שָׁמַר, also for נָצַר, etc;] to guard, watch; (a) to guard or watch: with cogn. accusative, φυλακάς, Luk.2:8; with accusative of person(s), Act.12:4 28:16; pass, Luk.8:29, Act.23:35; with accusative of thing(s), Act.22:20; (b) to guard or protect: with accusative, Luk.11:21, Jhn.12:25 17:12, 2Th.3:3, 1Ti.6:20, 2Ti.1:12 1:14, 2Pe.2:5; ἑαυτὸν ἀπό, 1Jn.5:21 (Westc, in l); metaphorically of law, precept, etc, to keep, preserve, observe: Mat.19:20, Luk.11:28 18:21, Jhn.12:47, Act.7:53 16:4 21:24, Rom.2:26, Gal.6:13, 1Ti.5:21. Mid, to be on one's guard (against), keep oneself from, beware of: with accusative, Act.21:25, 2Ti.4:15; before ἀπό, Luk.12:15; ἵνα μή, 2Pe.3:17; as in LXX (Exo.12:17, Lev.18:4, al.), of laws, etc, to keep, observe: ταῦτα πάντα, Mrk.10:20 (cf. δια-φυάσσω). SYN.: τηρέω, q.v (AS)
Liddell-Scott-Jones
Word:
φυλάσσω
Origin:
a Meaning of g5442G
Transliteration:
phulassō
Gloss:
to keep/guard: protect
Morphhology:
Greek Verb
Definition:
φῠλάσσω, Attic dialect φυλάττω, Epic dialect infinitive φυλασσέμεναι [Refs 8th c.BC+]; poetry imperfect φύλασσε [Refs 5th c.BC+]: future φυλάξω [Refs 8th c.BC+]aorist ἐφύλαξα, Epic dialect φύλ- [Refs 8th c.BC+]: perfect πεφύλᾰχα [LXX+5th c.BC+]:—middle, future -άξομαι[Refs 5th c.BC+]; also in passive sense, [Refs 5th c.BC+]: aorist ἐφυλαξάμην [Refs 5th c.BC+]:—passive, future -αχθήσομαι[Refs 1st c.BC+]: aorist ἐφυλάχθην [Refs 2nd c.AD+]: perfect πεφύλαγμαι [Refs 5th c.BC+]; imperative, only in middle sense in early writers, πεφύλαξο [Refs 8th c.BC+]; participle, [Refs 8th c.BC+] A) absolutely, keep watch and ward, keep guard, especially by night, ἀνίη καὶ τὸ φυλάσσειν πάννυχον ἐγρήσσοντα [Refs 8th c.BC+]; εἰ μέν κ᾽ ἐν ποταμῷ δυσκηδέα νύκτα φυλάσσω [Refs 8th c.BC+]; (middle, see below c); σὺν κυσὶ. φυλάσσοντας περὶ μῆλα [Refs 8th c.BC+]; φ. τοῖς Ἀθηναίοις keep watch for, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; φ. ἕως. watch or wait till, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; φ. πηνίκα. [NT+5th c.BC+] A.2) to be on one's guard, [Refs 5th c.BC+] B) transitive, watch, guard, defend, ἀθανάτων ὅστις σε φυλάσσει [Refs 8th c.BC+]; σύας, μῆλα, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; φ. τινὰ ἀπὸ τῶν δυσχωριῶν guard one from. [Refs 5th c.BC+] keep away from, [Refs 4th c.BC+]: with accusative et infinitive, τοὐμὸν φυλάξει ὀ ὄνομα μὴ πάσχειν κακῶς [Refs 5th c.BC+]: followed by a relative clause, φ. ἑαυτὸν ὅπως μὴ ἀδικήσει [Refs 5th c.BC+]; φ. τινά, εἰ. [Refs]:—passive, to be watched, kept under guard, [Refs 5th c.BC+] B.2) watch for, lie in wait or ambush for, αὐτὸν ἰόντα λοχήσομαι ἠδὲ φυλάξω ἐν πορθμῷ Ἰθάκης [Refs 8th c.BC+]; φ. τὸ σύμβολον look out for the signal-fire, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; keep a watch on, [τινα] [Refs 5th c.BC+] B.2.b) especially watch, wait for, observe an appointed time or a fixed event, τὴν κνρίην τῶν ἡμερέων [Refs 5th c.BC+]; φυλάξαντες νύκτα wait for night, [Refs 5th c.BC+]: with a participle added, δείλην ὀψίην γινομένην φυλάξαντες [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἀριστοποιουμένους φ. τοὺς στρατιώτας D) [Refs 5th c.BC+] D.3) metaphorically, preserve, maintain, cherish, [χόλον] [Refs 8th c.BC+]; φ. ἔπος observe a command,[Refs 5th c.BC+]; λόγον πρός τινα [Refs 3rd c.AD+]; φ. σιγήν [Refs 5th c.BC+]; οὐ γὰρ ἀπειλὰς ὑμετέρας ἐφύλαξα I regarded not your threats, [Refs 3rd c.BC+]; φ. σκαιοσύναν cling to it, foster it, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; φ. τὸν θυμόν[Refs 5th c.BC+]; τἀγαθά, opposed to κτήσασθαι, [Refs 4th c.BC+]: with a predicate added, φ. τινά δεδεμένον [Refs 5th c.BC+] —passive, ὅσος παρ᾽ ὑμῖν ὁ φθόνος φυλάττεται is fostered by, [Refs 5th c.BC+] D.4) keep in a place, continue in, τόδε δῶμα φυλάσσοις, ἀθάνατός τ᾽ εἴης [Refs 8th c.BC+] D.5) notice, observe, Ath. [prev. cited] D.6) maintain, hold fast to a view, τινὰ σπουδαῖον εἶναι [Refs 3rd c.AD+] D.7) with accusative, beware of, avoid, ἅπαντα ταῦτα φυλάττειν κελεύει [Refs 2nd c.AD+] D.8) φ. μὴ with subjunctive, take care lest. [Refs 5th c.BC+]; φ. ἐμὲ καὶ τηρεῖν ὅπως μή. [Refs 4th c.BC+] D.9) middle, φυλάξασθε τοῦ ἀγαπᾶν Κύριον be careful to, [LXX] C) middle, C.I) absolutely, to be on one's guard, keep watch, [Refs 8th c.BC+] only in participle, νύκτα φυλασσομένοισι [Refs 8th c.BC+]; πεφυλαγμένος εἶναι to be cautious, prudent,[Refs 5th c.BC+]with caution, [Refs] C.I.2) with accusative, keep a thing by one, bear it in mind or memory, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; more fully, ἐν θυμῷ δ᾽ εὖ πάντα φυλάσσεο[Refs 5th c.BC+] C.I.3) guard, keep safe, καὶ κεφαλὴν πεφύλαξο Oracle texts cited in [Refs 5th c.BC+] C.I.4) with genitive, φυλάσσεσθαι τῶν νεῶν μὴ ξυντρίψωσιν act cautiously with regard to the ships, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; beware of, τῶν εὖ φύλαξαι [Refs 5th c.BC+] C.II) φυλάσσεσθαί τι or τινα to beware of, be on one's guard against, avoid a thing or person, [Refs 7th c.BC+]; τινας [Refs 5th c.BC+] C.II.b) ἐφυλαξάμην διαλέκτους I put in as a precaution 'except in dialects', [Refs] C.II.2) φ. πρός τι [Refs 5th c.BC+] C.II.3) with infinitive, φυλάξομαι δὲ τάσδε μεμνῆσθαι. ἐφετμάς [Refs 5th c.BC+]; but also without μή, ἵνα. τις ὕστερον φυλάσσηται ἐπὶ γῆν τὴν σὴν στρατεύεσθαι [Refs 5th c.BC+] C.II.4) φ. μή followed by subjunctive, take care lest, τούτου φυλάσσου μή ποτ᾽ ἀχθεσθῇ κέαρ [Refs 5th c.BC+]; so φ. ὅπως μή. [Refs 5th c.BC+]
Strongs > g5442
Word:
φυλάσσω
Transliteration:
phylássō
Pronounciation:
foo-las'-so
Language:
Greek
Morphhology:
Verb
Definition:
to watch, i.e. be on guard (literally of figuratively); by implication, to preserve, obey, avoid; beward, keep (self), observe, save; probably from g5443 (φυλή) through the idea of isolation
them
Strongs:
Lexicon:
αὐτός
Greek:
αὐτοὺς
Transliteration:
autous
Context:
Next word
Gloss:
he/she/it/self
Morphhology:
Personal pronoun Accusative Plural Masculine
Grammar:
a reference to recently mentioned male people or things that are having something done to them
Source:
Identical in all sources
Additional:
them
Alternates:
Tyndale
Word:
αὐτός
Transliteration:
autos
Gloss:
it/s/he
Morphhology:
Greek Personal Pronoun (3rd person)
Definition:
αὐτός, -ή, -ό, determinative pron., in late Gk. much more frequently than in cl. (WM, 178f; Jannaris, HGG, §1399). 1) Emphatic (so always in nom. exc. when preceded by the art, see infr, iii); (1) self (ipse), expressing opposition, distinction, exclusion, etc, αὐ. ἐκχυθήσεται, Luk.5:37; αὐ. ἐγινώσκεν, Jhn.2:25; αὐ.ὑμεῖς, Jhn.3:28; καὶ αὐ. ἐγώ, Rom.15:14; αὐ. Ἰησοῦς, Jhn.2:24; αὐ. καὶ οἱ μετ᾽ αὐτοῦ, Mrk.2:25; ὑμεῖς αὐ, Mrk.6:31; esp. (as freq in cl.) αὐ. ὁ, Mat.3:4, Mrk.6:17, Jhn.16:27, 1Th.3:11, al; in late Gk, sometimes weakened, ἐν αὐτῇ τ. ὥρᾳ, in that hour, Luk.10:21 (M, Pr., 91; MM, see word); (2) emphatic, he, she, it (M, Pr., 86; Bl, §48, 1, 2, 7), Mat.1:21, 12:50, Luk.6:35, al; pointing to some one as master (cl.), Mat.8:24, Mrk.4:38, al; αὐ, καὶ αὐ. = οὗτος, ὁ δε (BL, §48, 1), Mat.14:2, Mrk.14:15, 44, Luk.1:22, 2:28, al. 2) In oblique cases (cl.), for the simple pron. of 3rd of person(s), he, she, it, Mat.7:9, 10:12, 26:44, al; with ptcp. in genitive absol, Mat.9:18, Mrk.13:1, al. (for irreg. constructions, V. Bl, §74, 5); pleonastically after the relative (cf. Heb. אֲשֶׁר לוֹ; WM, 184ff; Bl, §50, 4; MM, see word), Mrk.7:25, Rev.3:8, 7:2, al; in constr. ad sensum, without proper subject expressly indicated, Mat.4:23, Act.8:5, 2Co.2:13, al; genitive αὐτοῦ = ἐκείνου, Rom.11:11, 1Th.2:19, Tit.3:5, Heb.2:4. 3) ὁ, ἡ, τὸ αὐ, the same: Heb.1:12, 13:8; τὸ αὐ, ποιεῖν, Mat.5:46, 47, al; φρονεῖν, Rom.12:16, 15:5, Php.2:2, al; τὰ αὐ, Act.15:27, Rom.2:1, al; κατὰ τὸ (τὰ) αὐ. (MM, see word), Act.14:1, Luk.6:23, al; ἐπὶ τὸ αὐ, together (MM, see word), Mat.22:34, Act.1:15, al; ἓν κ. τὸ αὐ, 1Co.11:5, 12:11; with dative (cl.), 1Co.11:5; with a noun, λόγος, Mrk.14:39; μέτρος, Php.1:30; πνεῦμα, 1Co.12:4. (AS)
Liddell-Scott-Jones
Word:
αὐτός
Transliteration:
autos
Gloss:
it/s/he
Morphhology:
Greek Personal Pronoun (3rd person)
Definition:
αὐτός (Cretan dialect ἀϝτός [Refs] (also αὐτόν[Refs], reflexive pronoun, self:—in oblique cases used for the personal pronoun, him, her, it:—with Article, ὁ αὐτός, ἡ αὐτή, τὸ αὐτό (also ταὐτόν), etc, the very one, the same. I) self, myself, thyself, etc, accusative to the person of the Verb: frequently joined with ἐγώ, σύ, etc. (see. below 10), I.1) one's true self, the soul, not the body, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; reversely, body, not soul, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; oneself, as opposed to others who are less prominent, as king to subject, [Refs]; man to wife and children, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; warrior to horses, [Refs 8th c.BC+], or to weapons, [Refs]; shepherd to herd, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; seamen to ships, [Refs]: generally, whole to parts,[Refs 5th c.BC+]: absolutely, the Master, as in the [Refs 4th c.BC+] Latin Ipse dixit; so τίς οὗτος;— Αὐτός, i.e. Socrates, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἀναβόησον Αὐτόν[Refs]the Master, [Refs 5th c.BC+] the result will show, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; especially αὐτὸ δείξει[Refs 5th c.BC+]; of things, the very, ὑπὸ λόφον αὐτόν, i.e. just, exactly under, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; πρὸς αὐταῖς ταῖς θύραις close by the door, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; αὐτὸ τὸ δέον the very thing needed, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; αὐτὸ τὸ περίορθρον the point of dawn, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; αὐτὰ τὰ ἐναντία the very opposite, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; even, οὔ μοι μέλει ἄλγος οὔτ᾽ αὐτῆς Ἑκάβης[Refs 8th c.BC+] —In these senses αὐτός in Prose either precedes both the _Article_ and substantive, or follows both, e.g. αὐτὸς ὁ υἱός or ὁ υἱὸς αὐτός. The Article is sometimes omitted with proper names, or Nouns denoting individuals, αὐτὸς Μένων[Refs 5th c.BC+] I.2) of oneself, of one's own accord, ἀλλά τις αὐ. ἴτω[Refs 8th c.BC+]; also, in person, τῶν πραγμάτων ὑμῖν. αὐτοῖς ἀντιληπτέον[Refs 4th c.BC+] I.3) by oneself or itself, alone, αὐτός περ ἐών although alone, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; αὐτὸς ἐγείναο παῖδ᾽, i.e. without a mother,[Refs 8th c.BC+]by himself, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; αὐτοὶ γάρ ἐσμεν we are by ourselves, i.e. among friends, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; αὐτὰ γὰρ ἔστιν ταῦτα these and no others, [Refs 5th c.BC+] himself alone, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; αὐτὸς μόνος, see at {μόνος} II; αὐτὸς καθ᾽ αὑτόν, see at {ἑαυτοῦ}. I.4) in Philosophy, by or in itself, of an abstract concept or idea, δίκαιον αὐτό[Refs 5th c.BC+] is frequently in this sense, attached to Nouns of all genders, οὐκ αὐτὸ δικαιοσύνην ἐπαινοῦντες ἀλλὰ τὰς ἀπ᾽ αὐτῆς εὐδοκιμήσεις[Refs 5th c.BC+]; more fully, εἰ αὐτὸ τοῦτο πατέρα ἠρώτων, ἆρα ὁ πατήρ ἐστι πατήρ τινος, ἢ ο; [Refs]; ἀδελφός, αὐτὸ τοῦτο ὅπερ ἔστιν the ideal, abstract brother, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; less frequently agreeing with the substantive, ἵνα αὐτὴ δικαιοσύνη πρὸς ἀδικίαν αὐτὴν κριθείη[Refs 5th c.BC+]its very self, [Refs] I.5) in dative with substantive, in one, together, ἀνόρουσεν αὐτῇ σὺν φόρμιγγι he sprang up lyre in hand, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; αὐτῇ σὺν πήληκι κάρη helmet and all,[Refs 8th c.BC+] men and all, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; αὐτοῖσι συμμάχοισι allies and all, [Refs 5th c.BC+] I.6) added to ordinal Numbers, e.g. πέμπτος αὐτός himself the fifth, i. e. himself with four others, [NT+5th c.BC+] I.7) frequently coupled with οὗτος, τοῦτ᾽ αὐτό ἐστι τὸ ζητηθέν[Refs 5th c.BC+]; ταῦτα ἥκω αὐτὰ ἵνα. [Refs 5th c.BC+] I.8) καὶ αὐτός himself too, [Refs 8th c.BC+] I.9) repeated in apodosi for emphasis, αὐτὸς ἐπαγγειλάμενος σώσειν. αὐτὸς ἀπώλεσεν[Refs 5th c.BC+] I.10) in connexion with the person. pronoun, ἐγὼν αὐτός[Refs 8th c.BC+]; followed by an enclitic pronoun, αὐτόν μιν[Refs 8th c.BC+] I.10.b) with person. pronoun omitted, αὐτός. ἧσθαι λιλαίομαι, for ἐγὼ αὐτός, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; αὐτὸν ἐλέησον, for ἐμὲ αὐτόν,[Refs 8th c.BC+] is simply a strengthened form of ο; and so in Attic dialect, when σὲ αὐτόν, ἐμοὶ αὐτῷ, etc, are read divisim, they are emphatic, not reflexive; in this case αὐτός generally precedes the person. pronoun,[Refs 5th c.BC+] I.10.c) with the reflexive ἑαυτοῦ, αὑτοῦ, etc, to add force and definiteness, αὐτὸς καθ᾽ αὑτοῦ[Refs 4th c.BC+]; αὐτοὶ ὑφ᾽ αὑτῶν[Refs 5th c.BC+]; sometimes between the Article and reflexive pronoun, τοῖς αὐτὸς αὑτοῦ πήμασιν βαρύνεται[Refs 5th c.BC+] I.10.d) αὐτοῦ, αὐτῶν with possessive pronoun, πατρὸς κλέος ἠδ᾽ ἐμὸν αὐτοῦ[Refs 8th c.BC+]; τοῖς οἷσιν αὐτοῦ[Refs 8th c.BC+] I.10.e) αὐτὸς ἑαυτοῦ with comparative and superlative adjective, αὐτὸς ἑωυτοῦ ῥέει πολλῷ ὑποδεέστερος[Refs 5th c.BC+] I.11) αὐτός for ὁ αὐτός, the same, [Refs 8th c.BC+], and in later Prose, αὐταῖς ταῖς ἡμέραις[NT+2nd c.AD+] I.12) comparative αὐτότερος[Refs 5th c.BC+]: superlative αὐτότατος his very self, [Refs 5th c.BC+]. adverb, comparative αὐτοτέρως[Refs 2nd c.AD+] II) he, she, it, for the simple pronoun of 3 person, only in oblique cases (except in later Gk, [NT], and rarely first in a sentence, [NT+5th c.BC+]: rare in Epic dialect, [Refs 8th c.BC+], and mostly emphatic,[Refs 8th c.BC+]; so in Trag, [Refs 5th c.BC+]: in Prose, to recall a Noun used earlier in the sentence, ἐγὼ μὲν οὖν βασιλέα. οὐκ οἶδα ὅ τι δεῖ αὐτὸν ὀμόσαι[Refs 5th c.BC+]; after a Relative, ὅς κε θεοῖς ἐπιπείθηται. ἔκλυον αὐτοῦ[Refs 8th c.BC+]; especially where a second Verb requires a change of case in the pronoun, οἳ ἂν ἐξελεγχθῶσι. ὡς προδότας αὐτοὺς ὄντας τιμωρηθῆναι[Refs 5th c.BC+]; later, pleonastically after a Relative, ὧν ὁ μὲν αὐτῶν[NT+5th c.BC+] III) with Article ὁ αὐτός, ἡ αὐτή, τὸ αὐτό, and Attic dialect contraction αὑτός, αὑτή, ταὐτό and ταὐτόν (as required by the metre,[Refs 5th c.BC+] plural neuter ταὐτ; Ionic dialect ὡυτός, τὠυτό:—the very one, the same, rare in [Refs 8th c.BC+]: with dative, to denote sameness or agreement, especially in Prose, τὠυτὸ ἂν ὑμῖν ἐπρήσσομεν[Refs 5th c.BC+]; ὁ αὐτὸς τῷ λίθῳ the same as the stone, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἐν ταὐτῷ εἶναί τινι to be in the place with, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; προσίεσθαί τινα ἐς ταὐτὸ ἑαυτῷ to have a person meet one,[Refs 5th c.BC+]face to face, [Refs 4th c.AD+] III.2) in later Greek, the said, the above-named, Ἡρώδης ὁ αὐ.[Refs 3rd c.BC+] IV) Adverbial phrases: IV.1) αὐτὸ μόνον simply, merely, [Refs 1st c.AD+] IV.2) αὐτό as adverb, ={ἄρτι}, [Refs] IV.3) αὐτὸ τοῦτο as adverb, [NT+2nd c.BC+] IV.4) with Preps, ἐπὶ τὸ αὐτό added together, making a total, [Refs 2nd c.AD+]; κατὰ τὸ αὐτό together, at the same time,[NT], etc; but κατ᾽ αὐτό just then, [Refs 2nd c.AD+] V) In Compos: V.1) of or by oneself, self-, as in αὐτοδίδακτος, αὐτογνώμων, αὐτόματος: and so, independently, as in αὐτοκράτωρ, αὐτόνομος. V.2) hence, as a second self, very, bodily, as with proper names, Αὐτοθαΐς. V.3) in the abstract, the ideal, see above[Refs] V.4) precisely, as in αὐτόδεκα. V.5) rarely with reflexive sense of ἀλλήλων, as in αὐτοκτονέω. V.6) in one piece with, together with, as in αὐτόκωπος, αὐτοχείλης, αὐτόπρεμνος, αὐτόρριζος. V.7) by itself: hence, only, as in αὐτόξυλος, αὐτόποκος.—For αὐτοῦ, αὐτῶς, etc, see the respective Arts.
Strongs
Word:
αὐτός
Transliteration:
autós
Pronounciation:
ow-tos'
Language:
Greek
Definition:
the reflexive pronoun self, used (alone or in the comparative g1438 (ἑαυτοῦ)) of the third person , and (with the proper personal pronoun) of the other persons; her, it(-self), one, the other, (mine) own, said, (self-), the) same, ((him-, my-, thy- )self, (your-)selves, she, that, their(-s), them(-selves), there(-at, - by, -in, -into, -of, -on, -with), they, (these) things, this (man), those, together, very, which; from the particle (perhaps akin to the base of g109 (ἀήρ) through the idea of a baffling wind) (backward)
the
Strongs:
Lexicon:
ὁ
Greek:
τό
Transliteration:
to
Context:
Next word
Gloss:
the/this/who
Morphhology:
Definite article Accusative Singular Neuter
Grammar:
a SPECIFIC neuter person or thing that is having something done to them
Source:
Identical in all sources
Tyndale
Word:
ὁ
Transliteration:
ho
Gloss:
the/this/who
Morphhology:
Greek Article
Definition:
ὁ, ἡ, τό, the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article. I. As demonstr. pron. 1) As frequently in Hom, absol, he (she, it), his (etc.): Act.17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus). 2) Distributive, ὁ μὲν. ὁ δέ, the one. the other: 1Co.7:7, Gal.4:22; pl, Act.14:4, 17:32, Php.1:16, al; οἱ μὲν. ἄλλοι δέ, Mat.16:14, Jhn.7:12; οἱ μεν̀. ὁδέ, Heb.7:21, 23. 3) In narration (without ὁ μὲν preceding), ὁ δέ, but he: Mat.2:14, Mrk.1:45, Luk.8:21, Jhn.9:38, al. mult. II. As prepositive article, the, prefixed, 1) to nouns unmodified: ὁ θεός, τὸ φῶς, etc; to abstract nouns, ἡ σοφία, etc, to pl. nouns which indicate a class, οἱ ἀλώπεκες, foxes, Mat.8:20, al; to an individual as representing a class, ὁ ἐργάτης, Luk.10:7; with nom. = voc. in addresses, Mat.11:26, Jhn.19:3, Jas.5:1, al; to things which pertain to one, ἡ χεῖρ, his hand, Mrk.3:1; to names of persons well known or already mentioned; usually to names of countries (originally adjectives), ἡ Ἰουδαία, etc. 2) To modified nouns: with of person(s) pron. genitive, μοῦ, σοῦ, etc; with poss. pron, ἐμός, σός, etc; with adj. between the art. and the noun, ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθρωπος, Mat.12:35; the noun foll, by adj, both with art, ὁ ποιμὴν ὁ καλός, Jhn.10:11 (on ὁ ὄχλος πολύς, Jhn.12:9, see M, Pr., 84); before adjectival phrases, ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Rom.9:11. 3) To Other parts of speech used as substantives; (a) neuter adjectives: τ. ἀγαθόν, etc; (b) cardinal numerals: ὁ εἶς, οἷ δύο, etc; (with) participles: ὁ βαπτίζων (= ὁ Βαπτιστής, Mat.14:2), Mrk.6:14; πᾶς ὁ, with ptcp, every one who, etc; (d) adverbs: τὸ πέραν, τὰ νῦν, ὁ ἔσω ἄνθρωπος; (e) infinitives: nom, τὸ θέλειν, Rom.7:18, al; genitive, τοῦ, after adjectives, ἄξιον τοῦ πορεύεσθαι, 1Co.16:4; verbs, ἐλαχεν τοῦ θυμιᾶσαι, Luk.1:9; and frequently in a final sense, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρειν, Mat.13:3 (on the artic. inf, see Bl, §71). 4) In the neut. to sentences, phrases or single words treated as a quotation: τὸ Ἐι δύνῃ, Mrk.9:23; τὸ ἔτι ἅπαξ, Heb.12:27; τὸ ἀνέβη, Eph.4:9, al. 5) To prepositional phrases: οἱ ἀπὸ Ἰταλίας, Heb.13:24; οἱ ἐκ νόμου, Rom.4:14; neut. accusative absol, in adverbial phrases, τὸ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, daily, Luk.11:3; τὸ κατὰ σάρκα, as regards the flesh, Rom.9:5. 6) To nouns in the genitive, denoting kinship, association, etc: ὁ τοῦ, the son of (unless context indicates a different relationship), Mat.10:2, al; τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ, the things that pertain to God, Mat.16:23; τὰ τῆς εἰρήνης, Rom.14:19 (cf. M, Pr., 81ff; Bl, §§46, 47). (AS)
Liddell-Scott-Jones
Word:
ὁ
Transliteration:
ho
Gloss:
the/this/who
Morphhology:
Greek Article
Definition:
ὁ, ἡ, τό, is, when thus written, A) demonstrative Pronoun. B ) in Attic dialect, definite or prepositive Article. C ) in Epic dialect, the so-called postpositive Article, = relative Pronoun, ὅς, ἥ, ὅ.—The nominative masculine and feminine singular and plural, ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ, have no accent in codices and most printed books, except when used as the relative; but ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ differ only in writing from ὃ, ἣ, οἳ, α; the nominative forms of the article are said by Hdn.Gr.1.474 to be oxytone, and by [Refs 2nd c.AD+] in Aeolic dialect accusative to [Refs 8th c.BC+] genitive and dative dual τοῖιν [Refs 8th c.BC+]— In Doric dialect and all other dialects except Attic dialect and Ionic dialect the feminine forms preserve the old ᾱ instead of changing it to η, hence Doric dialect etc. ἁ, τάν, τᾶ; the genitive plural τάων contracts in many dialects to τᾶ; the genitive singular is in many places τῶ, accusative plural τώς, but Cretan dialect, etc, τόνς [Refs]; in Lesbian Aeolic dialect the accusative plural forms are τοὶς, ταὶς, [Refs]; dative plural τοῖς, ταῖς (or τοὶς, ταὶς, see above), [Refs]; ταῖσι as demonstrative, [Refs 7th c.BC+] Poets also used the Ionic dialect and _Epic dialect_ forms τοῖσι, ταῖσ; and in Trag. we find τοὶ μέν, τοὶ δέ, for οἱ μέν, οἱ δέ, not only in Lyric poetry, as [Refs 5th c.BC+]; but even in a trimeter, [Refs 5th c.BC+] {ὅ}; τὼ πόλεε Foed. cited in [Refs 5th c.BC+]; in [Refs 4th c.AD+] functions as genitive dual feminine, μεσακόθεν τοῖς κράναιυν [Refs 4th c.BC+] —in Elean and _Boeotian dialect_ ὁ, ἡ (ἁ), τό, with the addition of -ί, ={ὅδε}, ἥδε, τόδε, _nominative_ _plural_ _masculine_ τυΐ the following men, [Refs 3rd c.BC+] cf. Sanskrit demonstrative pronoun sa, sā, Gothic sa, sō, ONorse sá, sú, Old Latin accusative sum, sam (Enn.): —with τό [from *τόδ] cf. Sanskrit tat (tad), Latin is-tud, Gothic pata: —with τοί cf. Sanskrit te, Lithuanian tĩe, O[Refs 5th c.BC+] pá, etc:—with τάων cf. Sanskrit tāsām, Latin is-tarum:— the origin of the relative ὅς, ἥ, ὅ (which see) is different.) A) ὁ, ἡ, τό, DEMONSTR. PRONOUN, that, the oldest and in [Refs 8th c.BC+] the commonest sense: frequently also in [Refs 5th c.BC+], and sometimes in Trag. (mostly in Lyric poetry, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; τῶν γάρ, τῆς γάρ, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; seldom in Attic dialect Prose, except in special phrases, see infr. VI, VII): A.I) joined with a substantive, to call attention to it, ὁ Τυδεΐδης he—Tydeus' famous son, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; τὸν Χρύσην that venerable man Chryses, I.II: and so with appellative, Νέστωρ ὁ γέρων N.—thataged man, [Refs]; αἰετοῦ. τοῦ θηρητῆρος the eagle, that which is called hunter, [Refs]; also to define and give emphasis, τιμῆς τῆς Πριάμου for honour, namely that of Priam, [Refs]; οἴχετ᾽ ἀνὴρ ὤριστος a man is gone, and he the best, [Refs]:—different from this are cases [Refs 8th c.BC+] if he would help the Trojans, but drive those back to the ships—I mean the Achaeans, where Ἀχ. is only added to explain τούς, compare [Refs] A.II) frequently without a substantive, he, she, it, ὁ γὰρ ἦλθε [Refs 8th c.BC+] A.III) placed after its Noun, before the Relat. Prons, ἐφάμην σὲ περὶ φρένας ἔμμεναι ἄλλων, τῶν ὅσσοι Λυκίην ναιετάουσι far above the rest, above those to wit who, etc, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; οἷ᾽ οὔ πώ τιν᾽ ἀκούομεν οὐδὲ παλαιῶν, τάων αἳ πάρος ἦσαν. Ἀχαιαί such as we have not heard tell of yet even among the women of old, those women to wit who, [Refs 8th c.BC+] —for the _Attic dialect_ usage see below A.IV) before a Possessive pronoun its demonstrative force is sometimes very manifest, φθίσει σε τὸ σὸν μένος that spirit of thine, [Refs 8th c.BC+] A.V) for cases in which the Homeric usage approaches most nearly to the Attic, see below [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.VI) ὁ μέν, ὁ δέ. without a substantive, in all cases, genders, and numbers, [Refs 8th c.BC+] properly refers to the former, ὁ δέ to the latter; more rarely ὁ μέν the latter, ὁ δέ the former, [Refs 5th c.BC+]: sometimes in Partition, the one, the other, etc.—The Noun with it is regularly in genitive plural, being divided by the ὁ μέν, ὁ δέ, into parts, ἠΐθεοι καὶ παρθένοι, τῶν δ᾽ αἱ μὲν λεπτὰς ὀθόνας ἔχον, οἱ δὲ χιτῶνας εἵατο [Refs 8th c.BC+]: but frequently the Noun is in the same case, by a kind of apposition, ἴδον υἷε Δάρητος, τὸν μὲν ἀλευάμενον τὸν δὲ κτάμενον [Refs 8th c.BC+]: so in Trag. and Attic dialect, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; if the Noun be collective, it is in the genitive singular, ὁ μὲν πεπραμένος ἦν τοῦ σίτου, ὁ δὲ ἔνδον ἀποκείμενος [Refs 8th c.BC+] A.VI.2) when a negative accompanies ὁ δέ, it follows δέ, e.g. τὰς γοῦν Ἀθήνας οἶδα τὸν δὲ χῶρον οὔ [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.VI.3) ὁ μέν τις, ὁ δέ τις. is used in Prose, when the Noun to which ὁ refers is left indefinite, ἔλεγον ὁ μέν τις τὴν σοφίαν, ὁ δὲ τὴν καρτερίαν, ὁ δέ τις καὶ τὸ κάλλος [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.VI.4) on τὸ μέν, τὸ δέ, or τὰ μέν, τὰ δέ, [Refs] A.VI.5) ὁ μέν is frequently used without a corresponding ὁ δέ, οἱ μὲν ἄρ᾽ ἐσκίδναντο, Μυρμιδόνας δ᾽ οὐκ εἴα ἀποσκίδνασθαι [Refs 8th c.BC+]; by ἄλλος δέ, [Refs 8th c.BC+] A.VI.6) ὁ δέ following μέν sometimes refers to the subject of the preceding clause, τοῦ μὲν ἅμαρθ᾽, ὁ δὲ Λεῦκον. βεβλήκει [Refs 8th c.BC+]: rare in Attic dialect Prose, ἐπεψήφιζεν αὐτὸς ἔφορος ὤν· ὁ δὲ οὐκ ἔφη διαγιγνώσκειν τὴν βοήν [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.VI.7) ὁ δέ is frequently used simply in continuing a narrative, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; also used by [Refs 8th c.BC+] A.VI.8) the opposition may be expressed otherwise than by μέν and δέ, οὔθ᾽ ὁ. οὔθ᾽ ὁ [Refs 8th c.BC+] A.VII) the following usages prevailed in Attic dialect Prose, A.VII.1) in dialogue, after καί, it was usual to say in nominative singular masculine καὶ ὅ; in the other cases the usual forms of the Article were used (see. ὅς [Refs 4th c.BC+] II.I and cf. Sanskrit sas, alternatative form of sa); so, in accusative, καὶ τὸν εἰπεῖν [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.VII.2) ὁ καὶ ὁ such and such, τῇ καὶ τῇ ἀτιμίᾳ [Refs 5th c.BC+]: but mostly in accusative, καί μοι κάλει τὸν καὶ τόν [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἀνάγκη ἄρα τὸ καὶ τό it must then be so and so, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; but τὰ καὶ τά now one thing, now another, of good and bad, τὸν δ᾽ ἀγαθὸν τολμᾶν χρὴ τά τε καὶ τὰ φέρειν [Refs 6th c.BC+]; so πάντα τοῦ μετρίου μεταβαλλόμενα ἐπὶ τὰ καὶ ἐπὶ τά, of excess and defect, [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.VIII) absolutely usages of single cases, A.VIII.1) feminine dative τῇ, of Place, there, on that spot, here, this way, that way, [Refs 8th c.BC+], etc: also in Prose, τὸ μὲν τῇ, τὸ δὲ τῇ [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.VIII.1.b) with a notion of motion towards, that way, in that direction, [Refs 8th c.BC+] —only poetry A.VIII.1.c) of Manner, τῇ περ τελευτήσεσθαι ἔμελλεν in this way, thus, [Refs 8th c.BC+] A.VIII.1.d) repeated, τῇ μέν, τῇ δέ, in one way, in another, or partly, partly, [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.VIII.1.e) relative, where, by which way, only Epic dialect, as [Refs 8th c.BC+] A.VIII.2) neuter dative τῷ, therefore, on this account, frequently in [Refs 8th c.BC+] A.VIII.2.b) thus, so, [Refs 8th c.BC+] precedes, be translated, then, if this be so, on this condition, [Refs 8th c.BC+] A.VIII.3) neuter accusative τό, wherefore, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; also τὸ δέ absolutely, but the fact is, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; even when the τό refers to what precedes, the contrast may lie not in the thing referred to, but in another part of the sentence (compare above[Refs 5th c.BC+]; φασὶ δέ τινες αὐτὸν καὶ τῶν ἑπτὰ σοφῶν γεγονέναι· τὸ δὲ οὐκ ἦν but he was not, [Refs 1st c.BC+] A.VIII.4) τὸ μέν, τὸ δέ, partly, partly, or on the one hand, on the other, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; more frequently τὰ μέν, τὰ δέ, [Refs 5th c.BC+] in the first clause, τὸ δέ τι [Refs] several times. and finally, [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.VIII.5) of Time, sometimes that time, sometimes this (present) time, συνμαχία κ᾽ ἔα ἑκατὸν ϝέτεα, ἄρχοι δέ κα τοΐ (where it is possible, but not necessary, to supply ϝέτος) [Refs 6th c.BC+] from that time, [Refs 8th c.BC+] A.VIII.5.b) πρὸ τοῦ, sometimes written προτοῦ, before this, aforetime, [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.VIII.5.c) in Thess. Prose, ὑππρὸ τᾶς yesterday, τὰ ψαφίσματα τό τε ὑππρὸ τᾶς γενόμενον καὶ τὸ τᾶμον the decree which was passed yesterday (literal before this [day]), and to-day's, [Refs 3rd c.BC+] A.VIII.6) ἐν τοῖς is frequently used in Prose with Superlatives, ἐν τοῖσι θειότατον a most marvellous thing, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἐν τοῖς πρῶτοι the very first, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἐν τοῖσι πρῶτος (πρώτοις codices) [Refs 5th c.BC+]; [Ζεὺς] Ἔρωτά τε καὶ Ἀνάγκην ἐν τοῖς πρῶτα ἐγέννησεν first of all, [Refs 2nd c.AD+] the greatest number of ships, [Refs 5th c.BC+]: also with adverbs, ἐν τοῖς μάλιστα [Refs 5th c.BC+]: in late Prose, also with Positives, ἐν τοῖς παράδοξον [Refs 1st c.BC+] B) ὁ, ἡ, τό, THE DEFINITE ARTICLE, the, to specify individuals: rare in this signification in the earliest Gr, becoming commoner later. In [Refs 8th c.BC+] the demonstrative force can generally be traced, [Refs 4th c.BC+] I, but the definite Article must be recognized in places [Refs 8th c.BC+]: also when joined to an adjective to make it a substantive, αἰὲν ἀποκτείνων τὸν ὀπίστατον the hindmost man, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; also in τῶν ἄλλων [Refs]; also τὸ τρίτον[Refs]; τὸ μὲν ἄλλο for the rest,[Refs]—The true Article, however, is first fully established in 5th C Attic dialect, whilst the demonstrative usage disappears, except in a few cases, V. [Refs 4th c.BC+] —Chief usages, especially in _Attic dialect_ B.I) not only with common Appellats, adjectives, and Parts, to specify them as present to sense or mind, but also frequently where we use the Possessive pronoun, τὸ κέαρ ηὐφράνθην [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὴν κεφαλὴν κατεάγην my head was broken, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τοὺς φίλους ποιούμεθα we make our friends, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὰς πόλεις ἔκτιζον they began founding their cities, [Refs 5th c.BC+] B.I.b) omitted with proper nounsand frequently with Appellats. which require no specification, as θεός, βασιλεύς, see at {θεός} [Refs] III; ἐμ πόλει in the Acropolis, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; compare Θράσυλος in [Refs]; or when the person spoken of is to be specially distinguished, Ζεύς, ὅστις ὁ Ζεύς whoever this Zeus is, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; and therefore properly omitted when a special designation follows, as Σωκράτης ὁ φιλόσοφος: seldom in Trag. with proper nouns, save to give peculiar emphasis, like Latin ille, ὁ Λάϊος, ὁ Φοῖβος, [Refs 5th c.BC+] B.I.c) Aristotle says Σωκράτης meaning the historical Socrates, as in [Refs] when he means the Platonic Socrates, as [Refs] B.I.d) for Σαῦλος ὁ καὶ Παῦλος, etc, see at {καί} [Refs 5th c.BC+] B.I.2) in a generic sense, where the individual is treated as a type, οἷς ὁ γέρων μετέῃσιν. λεύσσει [Refs 8th c.BC+] B.I.2.b) frequently with abstract Nouns, ἥ τε ἐλπὶς καὶ ὁ ἔρως [Refs 5th c.BC+] B.I.3) of outstanding members of a class, ὁ γεωγράφος, ὁ κωμικός, ὁ ποιητής, ὁ τεχνικός, see at {γεωγράφος}, κωμικός, ποιητής, τεχνικός. B.I.4) with infinitives, which thereby become Substantives, τὸ εἴργειν prevention, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὸ φρονεῖν good sense, [Refs 5th c.BC+]infinitive, τὸ θεοὺς εἶναι the existence of gods, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὸ μηδένα εἶναι ὄλβιον the fact or statement that no one is happy, [Refs 5th c.BC+] B.I.5) in neuter before any word or expression which itself is made the object of thought, τὸ ἄνθρωπος the word or notion man; τὸ λέγω the word λέγ; τὸ μηδὲν ἄγαν the sentiment 'ne quid nimis', [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὸ τῇ αὐτῇ the phrase τῇ αὐτῇ, [Refs 5th c.BC+] the opinion about the question 'who ought to rule', [Refs]; τὸ ἐὰν μένητε παρ᾽ ἐμοί, ἀποδώσω the phrase 'I will give back, if. ', [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὸ ὀλίγοι the term few, [Refs 4th c.BC+] B.I.6) before relative clauses, when the Article serves to combine the whole relative clause into one notion, τῇ ᾗ φὴς σὺ σκληρότητι the harshness you speak of, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὸν ἥμερον καρπόν, καὶ τὸν ὅσος ξύλινος (i.e. καὶ τὸν καρπὸν ὅσος ἂν ᾖ ξύλινος) [Refs 5th c.BC+] B.I.7) before Prons, B.I.7.a) before the person Prons, giving them greater emphasis, but only in accusative, τὸν ἐμέ [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὸν. σὲ καὶ ἐμέ[Refs] B.I.7.b) before the interrogative pronoun (both τίς and ποῖος), referring to something before, which needs to be more distinctly specified, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τῆς ποίας μερίδο; [Refs 4th c.BC+]; τοῖς ποίοις; [Refs 4th c.BC+] B.I.7.c) with τοιοῦτος, τοιόσδε, τηλικοῦτος, etc, the Article either makes the pronoun into a substantive, ὁ τοιοῦτος that sort of person, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; or subjoins it to a substantive which already has an Article, τὴν ἀπολογίαν τὴν τοιαύτην [Refs 4th c.BC+] B.I.8) before ἅπας, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; also τὸν ἕνα, τὸν ἕνα τοῦτον, [Refs 4th c.BC+] see entry; and on οἱ ἄλλοι, οἱ πολλοί, etc, see at {ἄλλος} [Refs] B.I.9) the Article with the comparative is rare, if ἤ follows, [Refs 5th c.BC+] B.II) elliptic expressions: B.II.1) before the genitive of a proper name, to express descent, son or daughter, Θουκυδίδης ὁ Ὀλόρου (i.e. υἱός) [Refs 5th c.BC+]; Ἑλένη ἡ τοῦ Διός (i.e. θυγάτηρ) [Refs 5th c.BC+]: also to denote other relationships, e.g. brother, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἡ Σμικυθίωνος Μελιστίχη M.the wife of [Refs 5th c.BC+]; Κλέαρχος καὶ οἱ ἐκείνου Cl. and his men, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ὁ τοῦ Ἀντιγένεος the slave of [Refs 5th c.BC+] B.II.2) generally, before a genitive it indicates a wider relation, as τὸ τῶν νεῶν, τὸ τῶν Ἑρμῶν, the matter of the ships, the affair of the Hermae, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὰ τοῦ Ἀρριβαίου πράσσειν to promote the interests of Arrhibaeus, [Refs]; τὸ τῆς τύχης,=ἡ τύχη, [Refs]; τὰ τῆς τύχης accidents, chance events, [Refs]; τὰ γὰρ φθιτῶν τοῖς ὁρῶσι κόσμος performance of the rites due to the dead befits the living, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὰ τῶν θεῶν that which is destined by the gods, [Refs 5th c.BC+] what regards me or thee, my or thy business or interests, [Refs 5th c.BC+]: and with genitive of [Refs 5th c.BC+] is frequently also, a man's word or saying, as τὸ τοῦ Σόλωνος [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὸ τοῦ Ὁμήρου as Homer says, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; also τά τινος so-and-so's house, [NT+5th c.BC+] B.II.3) very frequently with cases governed by Preps. αἱ ἐκ τῆς Ζακύνθου νῆες the ships from Zacynthus, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; also τὰ ἐπὶ Θρᾴκης the Thrace-ward district, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὰ ἀπὸ τοῦ καταστρώματος matters on deck, [Refs]; τὰ ἀπ᾽ Ἀλκιβιάδου the proposals of Alcibiades, [Refs]; τὰ ἀπὸ τῆς τύχης the incidents of fortune, [Refs] B.II.4) on μὰ τόν, μὰ τήν, etc, see at {μά} IV. B.II.5) in elliptical phrases, ἐπορευόμην τὴν ἔξω τείχους (i.e. ὁδόν) [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἡ αὔριον (i.e. ἡμέρα), see at {αὔριον}; ἡ Λυδιστί (i.e. ἁρμονία) [Refs 4th c.BC+]; ὁ οἴκαδε πλοῦς [Refs 5th c.BC+], etc; but τό stands absolutely with Advs. of time and place, when one cannot (as in the preceding instances) supply a substantive, as κἀκεῖσε καὶ τὸ δεῦρο [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ὁ μὲν τὸ κεῖθεν, ὁ δὲ τὸ κεῖθεν [Refs 5th c.BC+] C) as RELATIVE PRONOUN in many dialects; both in nominative singular masculine ὅ, as κλῦθί μοι, ὃ χθιζὸς θεὸς ἤλυθες [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ὃ ἐξορύξη he who banishes him, [Refs]; and in the forms beginning with τ, especially in [Refs 8th c.BC+]: also in Ionic dialect Poets, ἐν τῷ κάθημαι [Refs 7th c.BC+]; τό [Refs]; τῶν[Refs]—Never in Comedy texts or Attic dialect Prose:—Epic dialect genitive singular τεῦ [Refs 8th c.BC+] D) CRASIS OF ARTICLE: D.a) Attic dialect ὁ, ἡ, τό, with ᾰ make ᾱ, as ἁνήρ, ἁλήθεια, τἀγαθόν, τᾄτιο; so οἱ, αἱ, τά, as ἅνδρες, τἀγαθ; also τοῦ, τῷ, as τἀγαθοῦ, τἀγαθῷ: ὁ, τό, οἱ, before e gives ου, οὑξ, οὑπί, οὑμός, τοὔργον, οὑπιχώριοι, etc; also τοῦ, as τοὐμοῦ, τοὐπιόντο; but ἅτερος, θάτερον ([musical notation]), Ionic dialect οὕτερος, τοὔτερον (see. ἕτερος), Attic dialect feminine ἡτέρα, dative θητέρᾳ (see. ἕτερος); τῷ loses the iota, τὠμῷ, τὠπιόντι: ὁ, τό, before ο gives ου, as Οὁδυσσεύς, Οὑλύμπιος, τοὔνομα: ὁ, τό, etc, before αυ gives ᾱυ, αὑτός, ταὐτό, ταὐτῷ (frequently written ἁτός, etc. in Inscrr. and Papyrus); so τὰ αὐτά=ταὐτά, αἱ αὐταί=αὑταί: ἡ before εὐ gives ηὑ, as ηὑλάβεια: τῇ before ἡ gives θη, as θἠμέρᾳ: τὸ before ὑ gives θου, as θοὔδωρ for τὸ ὕδωρ. D.b) other dialects: in their treatment of crasis these follow the local laws of contraction, hence, e.g, Doric dialect ὡξ from ὁ ἐξ [Refs 3rd c.BC+]; Ionic dialect ᾡσυμνήτης from ὁ αἰς-[Refs 5th c.BC+]; ὡυτή from ἡ αὐτή [Refs 1st c.AD+]
Strongs
Word:
ὁ
Transliteration:
ho
Pronounciation:
to
Language:
Greek
Definition:
the (sometimes to be supplied, at others omitted, in English idiom); the, this, that, one, he, she, it, etc; the definite article
both
Strongs:
Greek:
τε
Transliteration:
te
Context:
Next word
Gloss:
and/both
Morphhology:
Conjunction
Source:
Identical in all sources
Tyndale
Word:
τε
Transliteration:
te
Gloss:
and/both
Morphhology:
Greek Conjunction
Definition:
τέ, enclitic copulative particle (= Lat. -que as καί = and, ac, atque, not very frequently in NT, more than two-thirds of the occurrences being in Ac. 1) τέ solitarium, and, denoting a closer affinity than καί between words and sentences which it connects (BL, §77, 8): Mat.28:12, Jhn.4:42, Act.2:33, 37 40 10:22 11:21, al. 2) Denoting a closer connection than simple καί, τὲ. καί, τὲ καί, τὲ. τέ (Act.26:16 Rom.14:8), as well. as also, both. and: Luk.12:45, Act.1:1 15:9, 21:30, al; τὲ. δέ, and. and, Act.19:2; τὲ γάρ. ὁμοίως δὲ καί, Rom.1:26, 27. (AS)
Liddell-Scott-Jones
Word:
τε
Transliteration:
te
Gloss:
and/both
Morphhology:
Greek Conjunction
Definition:
τε, enclitic Particle, with two main uses (see. infr. A, B). A) as a Conjunction, A.I) τε. τε, both. and, joining single words, phrases, clauses, or sentences, the first τε merely pointing forward to the second, ἀνδρῶν τε θεῶν τε [Refs 8th c.BC+]; the elements joined by τε. τε are usually short in [Refs 8th c.BC+], longer in later Gr, e.g. ἐπειδὴ πρόξενοί τέ εἰσιν Ἀθηναίων καὶ εὐεργέται, ἔν τε τῇ στήλῃ γέγραπται [Refs 5th c.BC+]; χρὴ. τούς τε πρεσβυτέρους ὁμοιωθῆναι τοῖς πρὶν ἔργοις, τούς τε νεωτέρους. μὴ αἰσχῦναι κτλ. [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τά τε γὰρ ληφθέντα πάντ᾽ ἂν σῴζοιτο οἵ τ᾽ ἀδικήσαντες κατ᾽ ἀξίαν λάβοιεν τὰ ἐπιτίμια Aen.[Refs 3rd c.BC+]; κλείειν τε τὰ βλέφαρα δεομένων ἐλπιζόντων τε κοιμηθήσεσθαι [Refs 2nd c.AD+], compare 495,501; this use is common at all times in οὔτε. οὔτε, μήτε. μήτε, εἴτε. εἴτε (which see); τε may be used three or more times, ἔν τ᾽ ἄρα οἱ φῦ χειρί, ἔπος τ᾽ ἔφατ᾽ ἔκ τ᾽ ὀνόμαζεν [Refs 8th c.BC+] —ἑνδεκάτη τε δυωδεκάτη τε probably means the eleventh or twelfth, [Refs 8th c.BC+] —sometimes τε. τε couples alternatives, ἀπόρως εἶχε δοῦναί τε μὴ δοῦναί τε [Refs 5th c.BC+]; hence we find τε. ἢ, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; on ἢ (or ἦ). τε in [Refs 8th c.BC+] A.I.2) the first clause may be negative, the second affirmative, as ἐκκλησίαν τε οὐκ ἐποίει, τήν τε πόλιν ἐφύλασσε [Refs 5th c.BC+]; but οὔτε. τε is more frequently, as οὔτε ποσίν εἰμι ταχύς, γιγνώσκω τε [Refs 5th c.BC+]; we also find οὐ. τε, as οὐχ ἡσύχαζον, παρεκάλουν τε τοὺς ξυμμάχους [Refs 5th c.BC+]; and μὴ. τε, as ἵνα μή τι διαφύγῃ ἡμᾶς, εἴ τέ τι βούλει κτλ. [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.I.3) τε (both) sometimes corresponds to a following δέ (and), or τε (and) to a preceding μέν, e.g. A.I.3.a) τε. δὲ, as κόμισαί τέ με, δὸς δέ μοι ἵππους [Refs 8th c.BC+]; so with ἅμα δὲ καὶ, ὡσαύτως δὲ καὶ, [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.I.3.b) μὲν. τε, ἄνδρα μὲν, τρεῖς τε κασιγνήτους [Refs 8th c.BC+] A.I.4) a single τε (and) joins a word, phrase, or (especially later) clause or sentence to what precedes, τελευτὴν κεφαλήν τε [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ἕν τε οὐδὲν κατέστη ἴαμα, σῶμά τε αὔταρκες ὂν οὐδὲν διεφάνη, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; εἴς τε τὰς ἄλλας. ἀθροίζεσθαι [Refs 4th c.BC+]; ὅ τε γραφεὶς κύκλος. [Refs 3rd c.BC+]; χωρίς τε τούτων [Refs 3rd c.BC+]; καθόλου τε. [Refs 1st c.BC+]; this τε may be used any number of times, [NT+8th c.BC+] A.II) τε. καὶ, or τε καὶ, both. and, where τε points forward to καί, and usually need not be translated, e.g. Ἀτρείδης τε ἄναξ ἀνδρῶν καὶ δῖος Ἀχιλλεύς [Refs 8th c.BC+]; δειλός τε καὶ οὐτιδανὸς καλεοίμην[Refs]; τῆς τε γῆς ἐούσης ἐπιτηδέης καὶ τῶν ποταμῶν ἐόντων σφι συμμάχων [Refs 5th c.BC+]; sometimes the elements joined by τε. καὶ. are joined in order to be compared or contrasted rather than simply joined, κάκιστος νῦν τε καὶ πάλαι δοκεῖ [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἐπαύσατό τε ὁ ἄνεμος καὶ τὸ κῦμα ἔστρωτο[Refs 5th c.BC+]; sometimes (like τε. τε) even used of alternatives, διάνδιχα μερμήριξεν, ἵππους τε στρέψαι καὶ ἐναντίβιον μαχέσασθαι [Refs 8th c.BC+] A.II.2) in this sense τ᾽ ἠδέ is only Epic dialect, σκῆπτρόν τ᾽ ἠδὲ θέμιστας [Refs 8th c.BC+]; also τε, ἰδέ, χαλκόν τε ἰδὲ λόφον [Refs] A.II.3) καὶ. τε, both. and. , is occasionally found, as καὶ μητέρα πατέρα τ᾽ [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.II.3.b) καὶ. τε perhaps means and. also in καὶ ναυτικῷ τε ἅμα [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.II.4) τε. τε or τε. καὶ. sometimes join elements which are not syntactically parallel, especially a participle and a finite verb, ἰοῖσίν τε τιτυσκόμενοι λάεσσί τ᾽ ἔβαλλον (for βάλλοντες) [Refs 8th c.BC+] A.II.5) the copulative τε[Refs] it is found about 150 times in [NT] B) In Epic dialect (more rarely in other dactylic verse, see below [Refs] τε stands in general or frequentative statements or in statements of what is well known; such statements are frequently made as justifications of a preceding particular statement or of a preceding exhortation to a particular person or persons; the sense of τε thus approaches that of τοι (compare τοι and τε in [Refs 8th c.BC+]; although associated with numerous particles and other words of particular types (see. below) its meaning remains independent of these and applies to the whole sentence in which it stands: αἶψά τε φυλόπιδος πέλεται κόρος ἀνθρώποισιν [Refs 8th c.BC+]; δύσζηλοι γάρ τ᾽ εἰμὲν ἐπὶ χθονὶ φῦλ᾽ ἀνθρώπων[Refs 8th c.BC+]; νεμεσσῶμαί γε μὲν οὐδέν· καὶ γάρ τίς τ᾽ ἀλλοῖον ὀδύρεται ἄνδρ᾽ ὀλέσασα. ἢ Ὀδυσῆ᾽ [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ὃν Βριάρεων καλέουσι θεοί, ἄνδρες δέ τε πάντες Αἰγαίων᾽ [Refs]; sometimes of repeated action by particular persons, ἄλλοτε μέν τε γόῳ φρένα τέρπομαι [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ἡ δὲ. μ᾽ αἰεὶ. νεικεῖ, καί τέ μέ φησι μάχῃ Τρώεσσιν ἀρήγειν[Refs] B.2) in exhortations addressed to an individual, a subsidiary sentence or relative clause in which he is reminded of his special or characteristic sphere of activity is marked by τε, e.g. Ἑρμεία, σοὶ γάρ τε μάλιστά γε φίλτατόν ἐστιν ἀνδρὶ ἑταιρίσσαι καί τ᾽ ἔκλυες ᾧ κ᾽ ἐθέλῃσθα, βάσκ᾽ ἴθι. [Refs 8th c.BC+] B.3) similarly in general and frequentative statements consisting of two clauses (one of which may be a relative clause, frequently containing the subjunctive or optative), in which the fulfilment of the condition stated in the subsidiary or subordinate clause is declared to be generally or always followed by the result stated in the principal clause, either or both clauses may contain τε: B.3.a) the principal clause alone contains τε, ὅς κε θεοῖς ἐπιπείθηται, μάλα τ᾽ ἔκλυον αὐτοῦ [Refs 8th c.BC+] B.3.b) the subordinate clause alone contains τε, λάζετο δ᾽ ἔγχος. τῷ δάμνησι στίχας ἀνδρῶν ἡρώων οἷσίν τε κοτέσσεται ὀβριμοπάτρη [Refs 8th c.BC+]: it is probably that τε has been replaced by κε in the text of [Refs 8th c.BC+], and some other passages in which κε seems to be used, exceptionally, in general relative clauses. B.3.c) both clauses contain τε, ὃς μέν τ᾽ αἰδέσεται κούρας Διὸς ἆσσον ἰούσας, τὸν δὲ μέγ᾽ ὤνησαν καί τ᾽ ἔκλυον εὐχομένοιο [Refs 8th c.BC+] B.4) in the subordinate clause of a collective sentence, in which the principal clause states something to be true of all those (i.e. each individual) to whom the predicate of the subordinate clause applies, ὑπόσχωμαι. κτήματα. πάντα μάλ᾽ ὅσσα τ᾽ Ἀλέξανδρος. ἠγάγετο Τροίηνδ᾽. δωσέμεν [Refs 8th c.BC+] B.5) in relative clauses (and in parenthetic principal clauses) which indicate what is customary, ἐπεὶ οὐχ ἱερήϊον οὐδὲ βοείην ἀρνύσθην, ἅ τε ποσσὶν ἀέθλια γίγνεται ἀνδρῶν which are the usual prizes, [Refs 8th c.BC+]: similarly in clauses with οἷά τε (πολλά), κῆτος ἐπισσεύῃ μέγα δαίμων ἐξ ἁλός, οἷά τε πολλὰ τρέφει. Ἀμφιτρίτη [Refs] B.6) in relative clauses indicating what is true of all persons or things denoted by the same word, οὐ γάρ τις νήσων ἱππήλατος οὐδ᾽ εὐλείμων αἵ θ᾽ ἁλὶ κεκλίαται no one of the islands which lie in the sea (as all islands do, i.e. no island at all), [Refs 8th c.BC+] B.7) when the antecedent is a definite group of gods or men, the relative clause with τε indicates an essential characteristic of the antecedent, Ἐρινύες, αἵ θ᾽ ὑπὸ γαῖαν ἀνθρώπους τείνυνται [Refs 8th c.BC+] or thing, the relative clause with τε indicates one of his or its general or essential characteristics or aspects, οὐ μὰ Ζῆν᾽ ὅς τίς τε θεῶν ὕπατος καὶ ἄριστος [Refs 8th c.BC+]; κεῖται ἀνὴρ ὅν τ᾽ (variant{ὃν}) ἶσον ἐτίομεν Ἕκτορι δίῳ, Αἰνείας [Refs]; the relative clause sometimes indicates what is customary, οὐδέ σε λήθω τιμῆς ἧς τέ μ᾽ ἔοικε τετιμῆσθαι μετ᾽ Ἀχαιοῖς [Refs 8th c.BC+] B.8) τε is used in descriptions of particular places or things when attention is called to their peculiar or characteristic features, or their position, e.g. Λιβύην, ἵνα τ᾽ ἄρνες ἄφαρ κεραοὶ τελέθουσι [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ἓξ δέ τέ οἱ (i.e. Σκύλλῃ) δειραὶ περιμήκεες [Refs]; ἐν δέ τε Γοργείη κεφαλή (in Athena's αἰγίς) [Refs 8th c.BC+]; χαλεπὸν δέ τ᾽ ὀρύσσειν ἀνδράσι γε θνητοῖσι (i.e. μῶλυ) [Refs 8th c.BC+]; sometimes τε draws attention to a well-known custom or permanent feature, ἀρξάμενοι τοῦ χώρου, ὅθεν τέ περ οἰνοχοεύει [Refs 8th c.BC+] B.9) a part of the anatomy is defined by a clause (containing τε) which indicates a feature which universally belongs to it, κατ᾽ ἰσχίον, ἔνθα τε μηρὸς ἰσχίῳ ἐνστρέφεται [Refs 8th c.BC+]; similarly a point of time is defined, ὥρῃ ἐν εἰαρινῇ, ὅτε τ᾽ ἤματα μακρὰ πέλονται [Refs 8th c.BC+] B.10) τε is used in relative clauses which define a measurement of a particular thing or action by reference to the measurement (in general) of some thing or action well known in daily life, γεφύρωσεν δὲ κέλευθον μακρὴν ἠδ᾽ εὐρεῖαν, ὅσον τ᾽ ἐπὶ δουρὸς ἐρωὴ γίγνεται [Refs 8th c.BC+]; more rarely the definition is by reference to the measurement of a particular thing or action, ἤσθιε. ἕως ὅ τ᾽ ἀοιδὸς ἐνὶ μεγάροισιν ἄειδεν[Refs] B.11) the frequently use of τε B in similes is to be explained under one or other of the {ταώς} heads, e.g. when reference is made to generally known kinds of things or natural phenomena, to human experience in daily life, or to well-known phenomena of the animal world, [Refs 8th c.BC+] B.II) in post-[Refs 8th c.BC+] Gr. this use of τε is more restricted; outside of Epic dialect and other early dactylic verse [Refs 8th c.BC+]; without generalizing force, [Refs 5th c.BC+] (without a verb, as in [Refs 8th c.BC+]; in later Gr. we find exceptionally ἔνθεν τε [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἀπ᾽ οὗ τε [Refs 3rd c.BC+]; οἵ τε [Refs 2nd c.BC+]; ἥ τ᾽ [Refs 2nd c.AD+]; καὶ ἔστιν ἔπη Μαντικὰ ὁπόσα τε (= which) ἐπελεξάμεθα καὶ ἡμεῖς [Refs 2nd c.AD+] C) in [Refs 8th c.BC+] τε is also (but less frequently) used in conjunction with other particles in contexts (mainly particular statements) such as the following: C.1) in assurances, statements on oath, and threats, σχέτλιος, ἦ τ᾽ ἐκέλευον ἀπωσάμενον δήϊον πῦρ ἂψ ἐπὶ νῆας ἴμεν [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ἦ τ᾽ ἄν in [Refs 8th c.BC+]; γάρ τε (assuming variant) in οὐ γάρ τ᾽ οἶδα [Refs 8th c.BC+] (but τ᾽ more probably = τοι, see at {σύ}); δέ τε in ἀγορῇ δέ τ᾽ ἀμείνονές εἰσι καὶ ἄλλοι [Refs 8th c.BC+]; μέν τε in σφὼ μέν τε σαώσετε λαὸν Ἀχαιῶν [Refs]; εἴ πέρ τε in οὔ τοι ἔτι δηρόν γε φίλης ἀπὸ πατρίδος αἴης ἔσσεται, οὐδ᾽ εἴ πέρ τε σιδήρεα δέσματ᾽ ἔχῃσιν [Refs 8th c.BC+] C.2) also in commands, warnings, and admonitions, σίγα, μή τίς τ᾽ ἄλλος Ἀχαιῶν τοῦτον ἀκούσῃ μῦθον [Refs 8th c.BC+]; τούσδε τ᾽ (variant δ᾽) ἐᾶν [Refs] C.3) also in passionate utterances, in clauses which indicate the cause of the speaker's passion or a circumstance which might have caused others to behave more considerately towards him, ὤ μοι ἐγὼ δειλή. ἥ τ᾽. τὸν μὲν. θρέψασα. ἐπιπροέηκα [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ἡμεῖς δ᾽ αὖ μαχόμεσθ᾽, οἵ πέρ τ᾽ ἐπίκουροι ἔνειμεν and we, who (mark you) are only allies (not γαμβροί and κασίγνητοι), are fighting, [Refs]; τρεῖς γάρ τ᾽ ἐκ Κρόνου εἰμὲν ἀδελφεοί for we, let me tell you, are three brothers, sons of Cronos (and Zeus has no prior title to power),[Refs 8th c.BC+] C.4) in descriptions of particular events and things where there is no general reference, κνίση μὲν ἀνήνοθεν, ἐν δέ τε φόρμιγξ ἠπύει [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ὥς (= so) τέ μοι ὑβρίζοντες ὑπερφιάλως δοκέουσιν δαίνυσθαι κατὰ δῶμα [Refs 8th c.BC+]; πόλιν πέρι δινηθήτην καρπαλίμοισι πόδεσσι, θεοὶ δέ τε πάντες ὁρῶντο uncertain [Refs 8th c.BC+]; so with οὐδέ τ᾽ (nisi to be read οὐδ᾽ ἔτ᾽), τὸν καὶ ὑπέδδεισαν μάκαρες θεοὶ οὐδέ τ᾽ ἔδησαν [Refs 8th c.BC+] C.5) ὅτε τε (when) frequently introduces a temporal clause defining a point of time in the past by means of a well-known event which occurred then, ἦ οὐ μέμνῃ ὅτε τ᾽ ἐκρέμω ὑψόθε; [Refs 8th c.BC+]; so also ὅτε πέρ τε. κέρωνται[Refs 8th c.BC+] C.6) in ὅ τε (that or because) the τε has no observable meaning, χωόμενος ὅ τ᾽ ἄριστον Ἀχαιῶν οὐδὲν ἔτισας [Refs 8th c.BC+] C.7) ἐπεί τε = {ἐπεί} (when) is rare in [Refs 8th c.BC+] C.8) where τ᾽ ἄρ occurs in questions, e.g. πῇ τ᾽ ἂρ μέμονας καταδῦναι ὅμιλο; [Refs 8th c.BC+], ταρ (which see) should probably be read, since ἄρ (α) usually precedes a τε which is not copulative; so perhaps ταρα should be read for τ᾽ ἄρα in [Refs 8th c.BC+] C.9) in ἣ θέμις ἐστὶν. ἤ τ᾽ ἀνδρῶν ἤ τε γυναικῶν [Refs 8th c.BC+], it is not clear whether τε is copulative (τε A) or generalizing (τε B) or neither (τε C); ἤ is probably ={ἦ} (accented as in ἤτοι (; ἤ τ᾽ ἀλκῆς ἤ τε φόβοιο is uncertain reading in [Refs]; ἤ τ᾽ = or is found in [Refs]than in [Refs 8th c.BC+] C.10) Rarer and later uses; C.10.a) also, especially with ἄλλος, Ἑρμεία, σὺ γὰρ αὖτε τά τ᾽ ἄλλα περ ἄγγελός ἐσσι [Refs 8th c.BC+]; εἰ οὖν περὶ τούτων ἐπιστροφὴν μὴ ποιήσει, οἵ τε λοιποί μοι τὰς χεῖρας προσοίσουσιν (-σωσιν Papyrus) [Refs 3rd c.BC+]; τῶν δὲ παρὰ ταῦτα ποιησόντων τά τε κτήνη ὑπὸ στέρεσιν ἀχθήσεσθαι πρὸς τὰ ἐκφόρια [Refs 2nd c.BC+]; see above [Refs 4th c.BC+] C.10.b) with ὅδε, adding a slight emphasis to the preceding word, εἰ δὴ τήνδε τε γαῖαν ἀνείρεαι [Refs 8th c.BC+] C.10.c) τε γάρ rarely ={καὶ γάρ} or γάρ, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; ἐάν τε γάρ for even if, [NT]; τήν τε γὰρ ἐπιθυμίαν οὐκ ᾔδειν for I had not known even lust. [NT] D) Position of τε: D.1) in signf. A, as an enclitic, it stands second word in the sentence, clause, or phrase, regardless of the meaning: ἐγγύθι τε Πριάμοιο καὶ Ἕκτορος near both Priam and Hector, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; τοῖς τε πόνοις καὶ μαθήμασι [Refs 5th c.BC+]: but article + noun, preposition + noun are frequently regarded as forming a unity indivisible by τε, τοῖς κτανοῦσί τε [Refs 4th c.BC+]; also the order is frequently determined by the meaning, τε being placed immediately after the word (or first word of a phrase or clause) which it joins to what precedes or to what follows, πατὴρ ἀνδρῶν τε θεῶν τε [Refs 8th c.BC+]; the copulative or preparatory τε precedes many other particles, e.g. τε γάρ, τ᾽ ἄρα, τέ τις. D.2) τε is enclitic in signfs. B, C also, and stands early in its sentence, clause, or phrase (see. above), but many particles which follow τε in signf. A precede it in signfs. B, C, e.g. in signfs. B, C we have δέ τε, μέν τε, γάρ τε, ἀλλά τε, δ᾽ ἄρα τε, ὅς ῥά τε, οὔτ᾽ ἄρ τε, καὶ γάρ τίς τε, ὅς τίς τε, καί τε. E) Etymology: signf. A is found also in Sanskrit ca, Latin -que; for signfs. B and c cf. Sanskrit ca in yá[hudot] káś ca 'whosoever (with following verb)', Latin -que in quisque, ubique, plerique, usque, neque, nec (= non in necopinans, etc.), Gothic ni-h 'not' (also 'and not'), Latin namque (= nam).
Strongs
Word:
τέ
Transliteration:
té
Pronounciation:
teh
Language:
Greek
Definition:
both or also (properly, as correlation of g2532 (καί)); also, and, both, even, then, whether; a primary particle (enclitic) of connection or addition
idol-sacrifices
Strongs:
Lexicon:
εἰδωλόθυτος
Greek:
εἰδωλόθυτον
Transliteration:
eidōlothuton
Context:
Next word
Gloss:
sacrificed to idols
Morphhology:
Adjective Accusative Singular Neuter
Grammar:
DESCRIBING a neuter person or thing that is having something done to them
Source:
Identical in all sources
Tyndale
Word:
εἰδωλόθυτος
Transliteration:
eidōlothutos
Gloss:
sacrificed to idols
Morphhology:
Greek Adjective
Definition:
εἰδωλόθυτος, -ον, (εἴδωλον, θύω), [in LXX: 4Ma.5:2 *;] sacrificed to idols: τὸ, τὰ εἰ, Act.15:29 21:25, 1Co.8:1, 4 7, 10 10:19, Rev.2:14, 2o. (AS)
Liddell-Scott-Jones
Word:
εἰδωλόθυτος
Transliteration:
eidōlothutos
Gloss:
sacrificed to idols
Morphhology:
Greek Adjective
Definition:
εἰδωλό-θῠτος, ον, sacrificed to idols: substantive εἰδωλόθυτα, τά, meats offered to idols, [NT]
Strongs
Word:
εἰδωλόθυτον
Transliteration:
eidōlóthyton
Pronounciation:
i-do-loth'-oo-ton
Language:
Greek
Morphhology:
Adjective
and
Strongs:
Lexicon:
καί
Greek:
καὶ
Transliteration:
kai
Context:
Next word
Morphhology:
Conjunction
Source:
Identical in all sources
Tyndale
Word:
καί
Transliteration:
kai
Gloss:
and
Morphhology:
Greek Conjunction
Definition:
καί, conj., and I. Copulative. 1) Connecting single words; (a) in general: Mat.2:18, 16:1, Mrk.2:15, Luk.8:15, Heb.1:1, al. mult; repeated before each of the terms in a series, Mat.23:23, Luk.14:21, Rom.7:12, 9:4, al. (b) connecting numerals (WM, §37, 4): Jhn.2:20, Act.13:20; (with) joining terms which are not mutually exclusive, as the part with the whole: Mat.8:33, 26:59, Mrk.16:17, Act.5:29, al. 2) Connecting clauses and sentences: Mat.3:12, Act.5:21, al. mult; esp. (a) where, after the simplicity of the popular language, sentences are paratactically joined (WM, §60, 3; M, Pr., 12; Deiss, LAE, 128ff.): Mat.1:21, 7:25, Mrk.9:5, Jhn.10:3, al; (b) joining affirmative to negative sentences: Luk.3:14, Jhn.4:11, IIIJhn.10; (with) consecutive, and so: Mat.5:1, 23:32, Heb.3:19, al; after imperatives, Mat.4:19, Luk.7:7, al; (d) = καίτοι, and yet: Mat.3:14, 6:26, Mrk.12:12, Luk.18:7 (Field, Notes, 72), 1Co.5:2, al; (e) beginning an apodosis (= Heb. וְ; so sometimes δέ in cl.), then: Luk.2:21, 7:12, Act.1:10; beginning a question (WM, §53, 3a): Mrk.10:26, Luk.10:29, Jhn.9:36. 3) Epexegetic, and, and indeed, namely (WM, §53, 3c): Luk.3:18, Jhn.1:16, Act.23:6, Rom.1:5, 1Co.3:5, al. 4) In transition: Mat.4:23, Mrk.5:1, 21, Jhn.1:19, al; so, Hebraistically, καὶ ἐγένετο (וַי:הִי; also ἐγένετο δέ), Mrk.1:9 (cf. Luk.5:1; V. Burton, §§357-60; M, Pr., 14, 16). 5) καὶ. καί, both. and (for τε. καί, see: τε); (a) connecting single words: Mat.10:28, Mrk.4:41, Rom.11:33, al; (b) clauses and sentences: Mrk.9:13, Jhn.7:28, 1Co.1:22, al. II. Adjunctive, also, even, still: Mat.5:39, 40; Mrk.2:28, al. mult; esp. with pron, adv, etc, Mat.20:4, Jhn.7:47, al; ὡς κ, Act.11:17; καθὼς κ, Rom.15:7; οὑτω κ, Rom.6:11; διὸ κ, Luk.1:35; ὁ κ. (Deiss, BS, 313ff.), Act.13:9; pleonastically, μετὰ κ. (Bl, §77, 7; Deiss, BS, 265f,), Php.4:3; τί κ, 1 Co 15:29; ἀλλὰ κ, Luk.14:22, Jhn.5:18, al; καίγε (M, Pr., 230; Burton, §437), Act.17:27; καίπερ, Heb.5:8; κ. ἐάν, see: ἐάν. ἐάν, contr. fr. εἰ ἄν, conditional particle, representing something as "under certain circumstances actual or liable to happen," but not so definitely expected as in the case of εἰ with ind. (Bl, §65, 4; cf. Jhn.13:17, 1Co.7:36), if haply, if; 1) with subjc. (cl.); (a) pres: Mat.6:22, Luk.10:6, Jhn.7:17, Rom.2:25, 26 al; { (b) aor. (= Lat. fut. pf.): Mat.4:9 16:26 (cf. ptcp. in Luk.9:25; M, Pr., 230), Mrk.3:24, Luk.14:34, Jhn.5:43, Rom.7:2, al; = cl. εἰ, with opt, Jhn.9:22 11:57, Act.9:2; as Heb. אִם = ὅταν, Jhn.12:32 14:3, I Jhn.2:28 3:2, Heb.3:7 " (LXX). 2) C. indic, (as in late writers, fr. Arist. on; see WH, App., 171; VD, MGr. 2, App., §77; Deiss, BS, 201f, LAE, 155, 254; M, Pr., 168, 187; Bl, §65, 4); (a) fut: Mat.18:19 T, Luk.19:40, Act.7:7; (b) pres: 1Th.3:8 (see Milligan, in l.). 3) With other particles: ἐ. καί (Bl, §65, 6), Gal.6:1; ἐ. μή (M, Pr., 185, 187; Bl, l.with), with subjc. pres, Mat.10:13, 1Co.8:8, Jas.2:17, 1Jn.3:21; aor, Mat.6:15, Mrk.3:27, Jhn.3:3, Rom.10:15, Gal.1:8 2:16 (see Lft, Ellic, in ll.); ἐ. τε. ἐ. τε, [in LXX for אִם. אִם, Est.19:13, al,] Rom.14:8. 4) = cl. ἄν (which see) after relat. pronouns and adverbs (Tdf, Pr., 96; WH, App., 173; M, Pr., 42f; Bl, §26, 4; Mayser, 152f; Deiss, BS, 202ff.): ὃς ἐ, Mat.5:19, Mrk.6:22, 23 Luk.17:32, 1Co.6:18, al; ὅπου ἐ, Mat.8:19; ὁσάκις ἐ, Rev.11:6; οὗ ἐ, 1Co.16:6; καθὸ ἐ, 2Co.8:12; ὅστις ἐ, Gal.5:10. (AS)
Liddell-Scott-Jones
Word:
καί
Transliteration:
kai
Gloss:
and
Morphhology:
Greek Conjunction
Definition:
καί, conjunction, copulative, joining words and sentences, A) and; also adverb, even, also, just, frequently expressing emphatic assertion or assent, corresponding as positive to the negative οὐ (μή) or οὐδέ (μηδέ). copulative, and, A.I) joining words or sentences to those preceding, ἦ, καὶ κυανέῃσιν ἐπ᾽ ὀφρύσινεῦσε Κρονίων [Refs 8th c.BC+]: repeated with two or more Nouns, αἱ δὲ ἔλαφοι κ. δορκάδες κ. οἱ ἄγριοι οἶες κ. οἱ ὄνοι οἱ ἄγριοι [Refs 5th c.BC+]; joining only the last pair, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; ὁ ὄχλος πλείων κ. πλείων ἐπέρρει more and more, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; to add epithets after πολύς, πολλὰ κ. ἐσθλά [Refs 8th c.BC+] A.I.2) to addalimiting or defining expression, πρὸς μακρὸν ὄρος κ. Κύνθιον ὄχθον to the mountain and specially to, [Refs 5th c.BC+] (sometimes in reverse order, πρὸς δῶμα Διὸς κ. μακρὸν Ὄλυμπον [Refs 8th c.BC+]; to add by way of climax, θεῶν. κ. Ποσειδῶνος all the gods, and above all. , [Refs 5th c.BC+]; frequently ἄλλοι τε καί, ἄλλως τε καί, see at {ἄλλος} [Refs]; ὀλίγου τινὸς ἄξια κ. οὐδενός little or nothing, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; κ. ταῦτα and this too. , γελᾶν ἀναπείθειν, κ. ταῦθ᾽ οὕτω πολέμιον ὄντα τῷ γέλωτι [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.II) at the beginning of a sentence, A.II.1) in appeals or requests, καί μοι δὸς τὴν Χεῖρα [Refs 8th c.BC+]; καί μοι λέγε, καί μοι ἀπόκριναι, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; frequently in Oratt, καί μοι λέγε. τὸ ψήφισμα, καί μοι ἀνάγνωθι, [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.II.2) in questions, to introduce an objection or express surprise, κ. τίς τόδ᾽ ἐξίκοιτ᾽ ἂν ἀγγέλων τάχο; [Refs 4th c.BC+]; κ. πῶς; pray how? [Refs 5th c.BC+]; κ. δὴ τί; but then what? [Refs]; κ. ποῖον; [Refs 5th c.BC+]; κ. τίς εἶδε πώποτε βοῦς κριβανίτα; [Refs 5th c.BC+]; κἄπειτ᾽ ἔκανε; [Refs 5th c.BC+]; κ. τίς πώποτε Χαριζόμενος ἑτέρῳ τοῦτο εἰργάσατ; [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.II.3) ={καίτοι}, and yet, [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.II.4) at the beginning of a speech, [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.III) after words implying sameness or like ness, as, γνώμῃσι ἐχρέωντο ὁμοίῃσι κ. σύ they had the same opinion as you, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἴσον or ἴσα κ, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἐν ἴσῳ (i.e. ἐστὶ) κ. εἰ. [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.III.2) after words implying comparison or opposition, αἱ δαπάναι οὐχ ὁμοίως κ. πρίν [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.III.3) to express simultaneity, ἦν ἦμαρ δεύτερον, κἀγὼ κατηγόμην [Refs 5th c.BC+]; παρέρχονταί τε μέσαι νύκτες κ. ψύχεται [τὸ ὕδωρ] [Refs 5th c.BC+]; [οἱ Λακεδαιμόνιοι] οὐκ ἔφθασαν τὴν ἀρχὴν κατασχόντες κ. Θηβαίοις εὐθὺς ἐπεβούλευσαν [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.IV) joining an affirmative clause with a negative, ἀλλ᾽ ὥς τι δράσων εἷρπε κοὐ θανούμενος [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.V) καί, καί. correlative, not only, but also. , κ. ἀεὶ κ. νῦν, κ. τότε κ. νῦν, [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.VI) by anacoluthon, ὣς φαμένη κ. κερδοσύνῃ ἡγήσατ᾽ Ἀθήνη, for ὣς ἔφη κ, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ἔρχεται δὲ αὐτή τε. κ. τὸν υἱὸν ἔχουσα, for κ. ὁ υἱός, [Refs 5th c.BC+] B) even, also, just, B.1) τάχα κεν κ. ἀναίτιον αἰτιόῳτο even the innocent, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; δόμεναι κ. μεῖζον ἄεθλον an even greater prize, [Refs]full five,[Refs 5th c.BC+] two or three, [Refs 5th c.BC+] B.2) also, κ. ἐγώ I also, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; κ. αὐτοί they also, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; Ἀγίας καὶ Σωκράτης κ. τούτω ἀπεθανέτην likewise died, [Refs]; in adding surnames, etc, Ὦχος ὁ κ. Δαρειαῖος [Refs 5th c.BC+]; nominative ὁ κ. first in [Refs 1st c.BC+], frequently later, [Refs 2nd c.AD+], etc; Ἰούδας ὁ κ. Μακκαβαῖος [NT+8th c.BC+]; εἴπερ τι κ. ἄλλο, ὥς τις κ. ἄλλος, [Refs 5th c.BC+], not only, but also. , see at {μόνος}; οὐδὲν μᾶλλον. ἢ οὐ καὶ. [Refs 5th c.BC+] B.2.b) frequently used both in the antecedent and relative clause, where we put also in the antecedent only, εἰ μὲν κ. σὺ εἶ τῶν ἀνθρώπων ὧνπερ κ. ἐγώ [Refs 8th c.BC+] B.3) frequently in apodosi, after temporal Conjs, ἀλλ᾽ ὅτε δή ῥα, κ. τότε δή. [Refs 8th c.BC+]; also after εἰ, [Refs 8th c.BC+]: as a Hebraism, κ. ἐγένετο. κ. [LXX+NT] B.4) with Advs, to give emphasis, κ. κάρτα [Refs 5th c.BC+]; κ. λίην full surely, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; κ. πάλαι, κ. πάνυ, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; κ. μάλα, κ. σφόδρα, in answers, [Refs 5th c.BC+] B.5) with words expressing a minimum, even so much as, were it but, just, ἱέμενος κ. καπνὸν ἀποθρῴσκοντα νοῆσαι [Refs 8th c.BC+]; οἷς ἡδὺ κ. λέγειν [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τίς δὲ κ. προσβλέψετα; who will so much as look at you? [Refs 5th c.BC+] B.6) just, τοῦτ᾽ αὐτὸ κ. νοσοῦμεν 'tis just that that ails me, [Refs 5th c.BC+]: frequently with a relative, τὸ κ. κλαίουσα τέτηκα [Refs 8th c.BC+]; and how long ago was the city sacked? [Refs 4th c.BC+]; ποῦ καί σφε θάπτε; where is he burying her? [Refs 5th c.BC+] B.7) even, just, implying assent, ἔπειτά με κ. λίποι αἰών thereafter let life e'en leave me, [Refs 8th c.BC+] B.8) κ. εἰ even if, of a whole condition represented as an extreme case, opposed to εἰ κ. although, notwithstanding that, of a condition represented as immaterial even if fulfilled,[Refs 8th c.BC+]; εἰ κ. ἠπιστάμην if I had been able, [Refs 5th c.BC+] each exert their force separtely, as εἴ περ ἀδειής τ᾽ ἐστί, καὶ εἰ. and if. [Refs 8th c.BC+] B.9) before a Participle, to represent either καὶ εἰ, or εἰ καί, although, albeit, Ἕκτορα κ. μεμαῶτα μάχης σχήσεσθαι ὀΐω, for ἢν κ. μεμάῃ, how much soever he rage, although he rage, [Refs 8th c.BC+] C) Position: καί and, is by Poets sometimes put after another word, ἔγνωκα, τοῖσδε κοὐδὲν ἀντειπεῖν ἔχω, for καὶ τοῖσδε οὐδέν [Refs 4th c.BC+] C.2) καί also, sometimes goes between a preposition and its case, ἐν κ. θαλάσσᾳ [Refs 5th c.BC+] C.3) very seldom at the end of a verse, [Refs 5th c.BC+] D) crasis: with ᾰ, as κἄν, κἀγαθοί, etc; with ε, as κἀγώ, κἄπειτα, etc, Doric dialect κἠγώ, κἤπειτα, etc; with η, as Χἠ, Χἠμέρη, Χἠμεῖς, etc; with ῐ in Χἰκετεύετε, Χἰλαρ; with ο, as Χὠ, Χὤστις, etc; with υ in Χὐμεῖς, Χὐποχείριον, etc; with ω in the pronoun ᾧ, Χ; with αι, as κᾀσχρῶ; with αυ, as καὐτό; with ει, as κεἰ, κεἰς (but also κἀς), κᾆτ; with εὐ, as κεὐγένεια, κεὐσταλή; with οι in Χοἰ (Χᾠ [Refs]; with ου in Χοὖτος, κοὐ, κοὐδέ, and the like.
Strongs
Word:
καί
Transliteration:
kaí
Pronounciation:
kahee
Language:
Greek
Morphhology:
Conjunction
Definition:
and, also, even, so then, too, etc.; often used in connection (or composition) with other particles or small words; and, also, both, but, even, for, if, or, so, that, then, therefore, when, yet; apparently, a primary particle, having a copulative and sometimes also a cumulative force
<the>
Strongs:
Lexicon:
ὁ
Greek:
τὸ
Transliteration:
to
Context:
Next word
Gloss:
the/this/who
Morphhology:
Definite article Accusative Singular Neuter
Grammar:
a SPECIFIC neuter person or thing that is having something done to them
Source:
Minor difference in King James sources, absent in Nestle/Aland and other sources
Tyndale
Word:
ὁ
Transliteration:
ho
Gloss:
the/this/who
Morphhology:
Greek Article
Definition:
ὁ, ἡ, τό, the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article. I. As demonstr. pron. 1) As frequently in Hom, absol, he (she, it), his (etc.): Act.17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus). 2) Distributive, ὁ μὲν. ὁ δέ, the one. the other: 1Co.7:7, Gal.4:22; pl, Act.14:4, 17:32, Php.1:16, al; οἱ μὲν. ἄλλοι δέ, Mat.16:14, Jhn.7:12; οἱ μεν̀. ὁδέ, Heb.7:21, 23. 3) In narration (without ὁ μὲν preceding), ὁ δέ, but he: Mat.2:14, Mrk.1:45, Luk.8:21, Jhn.9:38, al. mult. II. As prepositive article, the, prefixed, 1) to nouns unmodified: ὁ θεός, τὸ φῶς, etc; to abstract nouns, ἡ σοφία, etc, to pl. nouns which indicate a class, οἱ ἀλώπεκες, foxes, Mat.8:20, al; to an individual as representing a class, ὁ ἐργάτης, Luk.10:7; with nom. = voc. in addresses, Mat.11:26, Jhn.19:3, Jas.5:1, al; to things which pertain to one, ἡ χεῖρ, his hand, Mrk.3:1; to names of persons well known or already mentioned; usually to names of countries (originally adjectives), ἡ Ἰουδαία, etc. 2) To modified nouns: with of person(s) pron. genitive, μοῦ, σοῦ, etc; with poss. pron, ἐμός, σός, etc; with adj. between the art. and the noun, ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθρωπος, Mat.12:35; the noun foll, by adj, both with art, ὁ ποιμὴν ὁ καλός, Jhn.10:11 (on ὁ ὄχλος πολύς, Jhn.12:9, see M, Pr., 84); before adjectival phrases, ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Rom.9:11. 3) To Other parts of speech used as substantives; (a) neuter adjectives: τ. ἀγαθόν, etc; (b) cardinal numerals: ὁ εἶς, οἷ δύο, etc; (with) participles: ὁ βαπτίζων (= ὁ Βαπτιστής, Mat.14:2), Mrk.6:14; πᾶς ὁ, with ptcp, every one who, etc; (d) adverbs: τὸ πέραν, τὰ νῦν, ὁ ἔσω ἄνθρωπος; (e) infinitives: nom, τὸ θέλειν, Rom.7:18, al; genitive, τοῦ, after adjectives, ἄξιον τοῦ πορεύεσθαι, 1Co.16:4; verbs, ἐλαχεν τοῦ θυμιᾶσαι, Luk.1:9; and frequently in a final sense, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρειν, Mat.13:3 (on the artic. inf, see Bl, §71). 4) In the neut. to sentences, phrases or single words treated as a quotation: τὸ Ἐι δύνῃ, Mrk.9:23; τὸ ἔτι ἅπαξ, Heb.12:27; τὸ ἀνέβη, Eph.4:9, al. 5) To prepositional phrases: οἱ ἀπὸ Ἰταλίας, Heb.13:24; οἱ ἐκ νόμου, Rom.4:14; neut. accusative absol, in adverbial phrases, τὸ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, daily, Luk.11:3; τὸ κατὰ σάρκα, as regards the flesh, Rom.9:5. 6) To nouns in the genitive, denoting kinship, association, etc: ὁ τοῦ, the son of (unless context indicates a different relationship), Mat.10:2, al; τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ, the things that pertain to God, Mat.16:23; τὰ τῆς εἰρήνης, Rom.14:19 (cf. M, Pr., 81ff; Bl, §§46, 47). (AS)
Liddell-Scott-Jones
Word:
ὁ
Transliteration:
ho
Gloss:
the/this/who
Morphhology:
Greek Article
Definition:
ὁ, ἡ, τό, is, when thus written, A) demonstrative Pronoun. B ) in Attic dialect, definite or prepositive Article. C ) in Epic dialect, the so-called postpositive Article, = relative Pronoun, ὅς, ἥ, ὅ.—The nominative masculine and feminine singular and plural, ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ, have no accent in codices and most printed books, except when used as the relative; but ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ differ only in writing from ὃ, ἣ, οἳ, α; the nominative forms of the article are said by Hdn.Gr.1.474 to be oxytone, and by [Refs 2nd c.AD+] in Aeolic dialect accusative to [Refs 8th c.BC+] genitive and dative dual τοῖιν [Refs 8th c.BC+]— In Doric dialect and all other dialects except Attic dialect and Ionic dialect the feminine forms preserve the old ᾱ instead of changing it to η, hence Doric dialect etc. ἁ, τάν, τᾶ; the genitive plural τάων contracts in many dialects to τᾶ; the genitive singular is in many places τῶ, accusative plural τώς, but Cretan dialect, etc, τόνς [Refs]; in Lesbian Aeolic dialect the accusative plural forms are τοὶς, ταὶς, [Refs]; dative plural τοῖς, ταῖς (or τοὶς, ταὶς, see above), [Refs]; ταῖσι as demonstrative, [Refs 7th c.BC+] Poets also used the Ionic dialect and _Epic dialect_ forms τοῖσι, ταῖσ; and in Trag. we find τοὶ μέν, τοὶ δέ, for οἱ μέν, οἱ δέ, not only in Lyric poetry, as [Refs 5th c.BC+]; but even in a trimeter, [Refs 5th c.BC+] {ὅ}; τὼ πόλεε Foed. cited in [Refs 5th c.BC+]; in [Refs 4th c.AD+] functions as genitive dual feminine, μεσακόθεν τοῖς κράναιυν [Refs 4th c.BC+] —in Elean and _Boeotian dialect_ ὁ, ἡ (ἁ), τό, with the addition of -ί, ={ὅδε}, ἥδε, τόδε, _nominative_ _plural_ _masculine_ τυΐ the following men, [Refs 3rd c.BC+] cf. Sanskrit demonstrative pronoun sa, sā, Gothic sa, sō, ONorse sá, sú, Old Latin accusative sum, sam (Enn.): —with τό [from *τόδ] cf. Sanskrit tat (tad), Latin is-tud, Gothic pata: —with τοί cf. Sanskrit te, Lithuanian tĩe, O[Refs 5th c.BC+] pá, etc:—with τάων cf. Sanskrit tāsām, Latin is-tarum:— the origin of the relative ὅς, ἥ, ὅ (which see) is different.) A) ὁ, ἡ, τό, DEMONSTR. PRONOUN, that, the oldest and in [Refs 8th c.BC+] the commonest sense: frequently also in [Refs 5th c.BC+], and sometimes in Trag. (mostly in Lyric poetry, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; τῶν γάρ, τῆς γάρ, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; seldom in Attic dialect Prose, except in special phrases, see infr. VI, VII): A.I) joined with a substantive, to call attention to it, ὁ Τυδεΐδης he—Tydeus' famous son, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; τὸν Χρύσην that venerable man Chryses, I.II: and so with appellative, Νέστωρ ὁ γέρων N.—thataged man, [Refs]; αἰετοῦ. τοῦ θηρητῆρος the eagle, that which is called hunter, [Refs]; also to define and give emphasis, τιμῆς τῆς Πριάμου for honour, namely that of Priam, [Refs]; οἴχετ᾽ ἀνὴρ ὤριστος a man is gone, and he the best, [Refs]:—different from this are cases [Refs 8th c.BC+] if he would help the Trojans, but drive those back to the ships—I mean the Achaeans, where Ἀχ. is only added to explain τούς, compare [Refs] A.II) frequently without a substantive, he, she, it, ὁ γὰρ ἦλθε [Refs 8th c.BC+] A.III) placed after its Noun, before the Relat. Prons, ἐφάμην σὲ περὶ φρένας ἔμμεναι ἄλλων, τῶν ὅσσοι Λυκίην ναιετάουσι far above the rest, above those to wit who, etc, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; οἷ᾽ οὔ πώ τιν᾽ ἀκούομεν οὐδὲ παλαιῶν, τάων αἳ πάρος ἦσαν. Ἀχαιαί such as we have not heard tell of yet even among the women of old, those women to wit who, [Refs 8th c.BC+] —for the _Attic dialect_ usage see below A.IV) before a Possessive pronoun its demonstrative force is sometimes very manifest, φθίσει σε τὸ σὸν μένος that spirit of thine, [Refs 8th c.BC+] A.V) for cases in which the Homeric usage approaches most nearly to the Attic, see below [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.VI) ὁ μέν, ὁ δέ. without a substantive, in all cases, genders, and numbers, [Refs 8th c.BC+] properly refers to the former, ὁ δέ to the latter; more rarely ὁ μέν the latter, ὁ δέ the former, [Refs 5th c.BC+]: sometimes in Partition, the one, the other, etc.—The Noun with it is regularly in genitive plural, being divided by the ὁ μέν, ὁ δέ, into parts, ἠΐθεοι καὶ παρθένοι, τῶν δ᾽ αἱ μὲν λεπτὰς ὀθόνας ἔχον, οἱ δὲ χιτῶνας εἵατο [Refs 8th c.BC+]: but frequently the Noun is in the same case, by a kind of apposition, ἴδον υἷε Δάρητος, τὸν μὲν ἀλευάμενον τὸν δὲ κτάμενον [Refs 8th c.BC+]: so in Trag. and Attic dialect, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; if the Noun be collective, it is in the genitive singular, ὁ μὲν πεπραμένος ἦν τοῦ σίτου, ὁ δὲ ἔνδον ἀποκείμενος [Refs 8th c.BC+] A.VI.2) when a negative accompanies ὁ δέ, it follows δέ, e.g. τὰς γοῦν Ἀθήνας οἶδα τὸν δὲ χῶρον οὔ [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.VI.3) ὁ μέν τις, ὁ δέ τις. is used in Prose, when the Noun to which ὁ refers is left indefinite, ἔλεγον ὁ μέν τις τὴν σοφίαν, ὁ δὲ τὴν καρτερίαν, ὁ δέ τις καὶ τὸ κάλλος [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.VI.4) on τὸ μέν, τὸ δέ, or τὰ μέν, τὰ δέ, [Refs] A.VI.5) ὁ μέν is frequently used without a corresponding ὁ δέ, οἱ μὲν ἄρ᾽ ἐσκίδναντο, Μυρμιδόνας δ᾽ οὐκ εἴα ἀποσκίδνασθαι [Refs 8th c.BC+]; by ἄλλος δέ, [Refs 8th c.BC+] A.VI.6) ὁ δέ following μέν sometimes refers to the subject of the preceding clause, τοῦ μὲν ἅμαρθ᾽, ὁ δὲ Λεῦκον. βεβλήκει [Refs 8th c.BC+]: rare in Attic dialect Prose, ἐπεψήφιζεν αὐτὸς ἔφορος ὤν· ὁ δὲ οὐκ ἔφη διαγιγνώσκειν τὴν βοήν [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.VI.7) ὁ δέ is frequently used simply in continuing a narrative, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; also used by [Refs 8th c.BC+] A.VI.8) the opposition may be expressed otherwise than by μέν and δέ, οὔθ᾽ ὁ. οὔθ᾽ ὁ [Refs 8th c.BC+] A.VII) the following usages prevailed in Attic dialect Prose, A.VII.1) in dialogue, after καί, it was usual to say in nominative singular masculine καὶ ὅ; in the other cases the usual forms of the Article were used (see. ὅς [Refs 4th c.BC+] II.I and cf. Sanskrit sas, alternatative form of sa); so, in accusative, καὶ τὸν εἰπεῖν [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.VII.2) ὁ καὶ ὁ such and such, τῇ καὶ τῇ ἀτιμίᾳ [Refs 5th c.BC+]: but mostly in accusative, καί μοι κάλει τὸν καὶ τόν [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἀνάγκη ἄρα τὸ καὶ τό it must then be so and so, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; but τὰ καὶ τά now one thing, now another, of good and bad, τὸν δ᾽ ἀγαθὸν τολμᾶν χρὴ τά τε καὶ τὰ φέρειν [Refs 6th c.BC+]; so πάντα τοῦ μετρίου μεταβαλλόμενα ἐπὶ τὰ καὶ ἐπὶ τά, of excess and defect, [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.VIII) absolutely usages of single cases, A.VIII.1) feminine dative τῇ, of Place, there, on that spot, here, this way, that way, [Refs 8th c.BC+], etc: also in Prose, τὸ μὲν τῇ, τὸ δὲ τῇ [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.VIII.1.b) with a notion of motion towards, that way, in that direction, [Refs 8th c.BC+] —only poetry A.VIII.1.c) of Manner, τῇ περ τελευτήσεσθαι ἔμελλεν in this way, thus, [Refs 8th c.BC+] A.VIII.1.d) repeated, τῇ μέν, τῇ δέ, in one way, in another, or partly, partly, [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.VIII.1.e) relative, where, by which way, only Epic dialect, as [Refs 8th c.BC+] A.VIII.2) neuter dative τῷ, therefore, on this account, frequently in [Refs 8th c.BC+] A.VIII.2.b) thus, so, [Refs 8th c.BC+] precedes, be translated, then, if this be so, on this condition, [Refs 8th c.BC+] A.VIII.3) neuter accusative τό, wherefore, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; also τὸ δέ absolutely, but the fact is, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; even when the τό refers to what precedes, the contrast may lie not in the thing referred to, but in another part of the sentence (compare above[Refs 5th c.BC+]; φασὶ δέ τινες αὐτὸν καὶ τῶν ἑπτὰ σοφῶν γεγονέναι· τὸ δὲ οὐκ ἦν but he was not, [Refs 1st c.BC+] A.VIII.4) τὸ μέν, τὸ δέ, partly, partly, or on the one hand, on the other, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; more frequently τὰ μέν, τὰ δέ, [Refs 5th c.BC+] in the first clause, τὸ δέ τι [Refs] several times. and finally, [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.VIII.5) of Time, sometimes that time, sometimes this (present) time, συνμαχία κ᾽ ἔα ἑκατὸν ϝέτεα, ἄρχοι δέ κα τοΐ (where it is possible, but not necessary, to supply ϝέτος) [Refs 6th c.BC+] from that time, [Refs 8th c.BC+] A.VIII.5.b) πρὸ τοῦ, sometimes written προτοῦ, before this, aforetime, [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.VIII.5.c) in Thess. Prose, ὑππρὸ τᾶς yesterday, τὰ ψαφίσματα τό τε ὑππρὸ τᾶς γενόμενον καὶ τὸ τᾶμον the decree which was passed yesterday (literal before this [day]), and to-day's, [Refs 3rd c.BC+] A.VIII.6) ἐν τοῖς is frequently used in Prose with Superlatives, ἐν τοῖσι θειότατον a most marvellous thing, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἐν τοῖς πρῶτοι the very first, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἐν τοῖσι πρῶτος (πρώτοις codices) [Refs 5th c.BC+]; [Ζεὺς] Ἔρωτά τε καὶ Ἀνάγκην ἐν τοῖς πρῶτα ἐγέννησεν first of all, [Refs 2nd c.AD+] the greatest number of ships, [Refs 5th c.BC+]: also with adverbs, ἐν τοῖς μάλιστα [Refs 5th c.BC+]: in late Prose, also with Positives, ἐν τοῖς παράδοξον [Refs 1st c.BC+] B) ὁ, ἡ, τό, THE DEFINITE ARTICLE, the, to specify individuals: rare in this signification in the earliest Gr, becoming commoner later. In [Refs 8th c.BC+] the demonstrative force can generally be traced, [Refs 4th c.BC+] I, but the definite Article must be recognized in places [Refs 8th c.BC+]: also when joined to an adjective to make it a substantive, αἰὲν ἀποκτείνων τὸν ὀπίστατον the hindmost man, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; also in τῶν ἄλλων [Refs]; also τὸ τρίτον[Refs]; τὸ μὲν ἄλλο for the rest,[Refs]—The true Article, however, is first fully established in 5th C Attic dialect, whilst the demonstrative usage disappears, except in a few cases, V. [Refs 4th c.BC+] —Chief usages, especially in _Attic dialect_ B.I) not only with common Appellats, adjectives, and Parts, to specify them as present to sense or mind, but also frequently where we use the Possessive pronoun, τὸ κέαρ ηὐφράνθην [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὴν κεφαλὴν κατεάγην my head was broken, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τοὺς φίλους ποιούμεθα we make our friends, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὰς πόλεις ἔκτιζον they began founding their cities, [Refs 5th c.BC+] B.I.b) omitted with proper nounsand frequently with Appellats. which require no specification, as θεός, βασιλεύς, see at {θεός} [Refs] III; ἐμ πόλει in the Acropolis, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; compare Θράσυλος in [Refs]; or when the person spoken of is to be specially distinguished, Ζεύς, ὅστις ὁ Ζεύς whoever this Zeus is, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; and therefore properly omitted when a special designation follows, as Σωκράτης ὁ φιλόσοφος: seldom in Trag. with proper nouns, save to give peculiar emphasis, like Latin ille, ὁ Λάϊος, ὁ Φοῖβος, [Refs 5th c.BC+] B.I.c) Aristotle says Σωκράτης meaning the historical Socrates, as in [Refs] when he means the Platonic Socrates, as [Refs] B.I.d) for Σαῦλος ὁ καὶ Παῦλος, etc, see at {καί} [Refs 5th c.BC+] B.I.2) in a generic sense, where the individual is treated as a type, οἷς ὁ γέρων μετέῃσιν. λεύσσει [Refs 8th c.BC+] B.I.2.b) frequently with abstract Nouns, ἥ τε ἐλπὶς καὶ ὁ ἔρως [Refs 5th c.BC+] B.I.3) of outstanding members of a class, ὁ γεωγράφος, ὁ κωμικός, ὁ ποιητής, ὁ τεχνικός, see at {γεωγράφος}, κωμικός, ποιητής, τεχνικός. B.I.4) with infinitives, which thereby become Substantives, τὸ εἴργειν prevention, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὸ φρονεῖν good sense, [Refs 5th c.BC+]infinitive, τὸ θεοὺς εἶναι the existence of gods, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὸ μηδένα εἶναι ὄλβιον the fact or statement that no one is happy, [Refs 5th c.BC+] B.I.5) in neuter before any word or expression which itself is made the object of thought, τὸ ἄνθρωπος the word or notion man; τὸ λέγω the word λέγ; τὸ μηδὲν ἄγαν the sentiment 'ne quid nimis', [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὸ τῇ αὐτῇ the phrase τῇ αὐτῇ, [Refs 5th c.BC+] the opinion about the question 'who ought to rule', [Refs]; τὸ ἐὰν μένητε παρ᾽ ἐμοί, ἀποδώσω the phrase 'I will give back, if. ', [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὸ ὀλίγοι the term few, [Refs 4th c.BC+] B.I.6) before relative clauses, when the Article serves to combine the whole relative clause into one notion, τῇ ᾗ φὴς σὺ σκληρότητι the harshness you speak of, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὸν ἥμερον καρπόν, καὶ τὸν ὅσος ξύλινος (i.e. καὶ τὸν καρπὸν ὅσος ἂν ᾖ ξύλινος) [Refs 5th c.BC+] B.I.7) before Prons, B.I.7.a) before the person Prons, giving them greater emphasis, but only in accusative, τὸν ἐμέ [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὸν. σὲ καὶ ἐμέ[Refs] B.I.7.b) before the interrogative pronoun (both τίς and ποῖος), referring to something before, which needs to be more distinctly specified, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τῆς ποίας μερίδο; [Refs 4th c.BC+]; τοῖς ποίοις; [Refs 4th c.BC+] B.I.7.c) with τοιοῦτος, τοιόσδε, τηλικοῦτος, etc, the Article either makes the pronoun into a substantive, ὁ τοιοῦτος that sort of person, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; or subjoins it to a substantive which already has an Article, τὴν ἀπολογίαν τὴν τοιαύτην [Refs 4th c.BC+] B.I.8) before ἅπας, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; also τὸν ἕνα, τὸν ἕνα τοῦτον, [Refs 4th c.BC+] see entry; and on οἱ ἄλλοι, οἱ πολλοί, etc, see at {ἄλλος} [Refs] B.I.9) the Article with the comparative is rare, if ἤ follows, [Refs 5th c.BC+] B.II) elliptic expressions: B.II.1) before the genitive of a proper name, to express descent, son or daughter, Θουκυδίδης ὁ Ὀλόρου (i.e. υἱός) [Refs 5th c.BC+]; Ἑλένη ἡ τοῦ Διός (i.e. θυγάτηρ) [Refs 5th c.BC+]: also to denote other relationships, e.g. brother, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἡ Σμικυθίωνος Μελιστίχη M.the wife of [Refs 5th c.BC+]; Κλέαρχος καὶ οἱ ἐκείνου Cl. and his men, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ὁ τοῦ Ἀντιγένεος the slave of [Refs 5th c.BC+] B.II.2) generally, before a genitive it indicates a wider relation, as τὸ τῶν νεῶν, τὸ τῶν Ἑρμῶν, the matter of the ships, the affair of the Hermae, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὰ τοῦ Ἀρριβαίου πράσσειν to promote the interests of Arrhibaeus, [Refs]; τὸ τῆς τύχης,=ἡ τύχη, [Refs]; τὰ τῆς τύχης accidents, chance events, [Refs]; τὰ γὰρ φθιτῶν τοῖς ὁρῶσι κόσμος performance of the rites due to the dead befits the living, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὰ τῶν θεῶν that which is destined by the gods, [Refs 5th c.BC+] what regards me or thee, my or thy business or interests, [Refs 5th c.BC+]: and with genitive of [Refs 5th c.BC+] is frequently also, a man's word or saying, as τὸ τοῦ Σόλωνος [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὸ τοῦ Ὁμήρου as Homer says, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; also τά τινος so-and-so's house, [NT+5th c.BC+] B.II.3) very frequently with cases governed by Preps. αἱ ἐκ τῆς Ζακύνθου νῆες the ships from Zacynthus, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; also τὰ ἐπὶ Θρᾴκης the Thrace-ward district, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὰ ἀπὸ τοῦ καταστρώματος matters on deck, [Refs]; τὰ ἀπ᾽ Ἀλκιβιάδου the proposals of Alcibiades, [Refs]; τὰ ἀπὸ τῆς τύχης the incidents of fortune, [Refs] B.II.4) on μὰ τόν, μὰ τήν, etc, see at {μά} IV. B.II.5) in elliptical phrases, ἐπορευόμην τὴν ἔξω τείχους (i.e. ὁδόν) [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἡ αὔριον (i.e. ἡμέρα), see at {αὔριον}; ἡ Λυδιστί (i.e. ἁρμονία) [Refs 4th c.BC+]; ὁ οἴκαδε πλοῦς [Refs 5th c.BC+], etc; but τό stands absolutely with Advs. of time and place, when one cannot (as in the preceding instances) supply a substantive, as κἀκεῖσε καὶ τὸ δεῦρο [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ὁ μὲν τὸ κεῖθεν, ὁ δὲ τὸ κεῖθεν [Refs 5th c.BC+] C) as RELATIVE PRONOUN in many dialects; both in nominative singular masculine ὅ, as κλῦθί μοι, ὃ χθιζὸς θεὸς ἤλυθες [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ὃ ἐξορύξη he who banishes him, [Refs]; and in the forms beginning with τ, especially in [Refs 8th c.BC+]: also in Ionic dialect Poets, ἐν τῷ κάθημαι [Refs 7th c.BC+]; τό [Refs]; τῶν[Refs]—Never in Comedy texts or Attic dialect Prose:—Epic dialect genitive singular τεῦ [Refs 8th c.BC+] D) CRASIS OF ARTICLE: D.a) Attic dialect ὁ, ἡ, τό, with ᾰ make ᾱ, as ἁνήρ, ἁλήθεια, τἀγαθόν, τᾄτιο; so οἱ, αἱ, τά, as ἅνδρες, τἀγαθ; also τοῦ, τῷ, as τἀγαθοῦ, τἀγαθῷ: ὁ, τό, οἱ, before e gives ου, οὑξ, οὑπί, οὑμός, τοὔργον, οὑπιχώριοι, etc; also τοῦ, as τοὐμοῦ, τοὐπιόντο; but ἅτερος, θάτερον ([musical notation]), Ionic dialect οὕτερος, τοὔτερον (see. ἕτερος), Attic dialect feminine ἡτέρα, dative θητέρᾳ (see. ἕτερος); τῷ loses the iota, τὠμῷ, τὠπιόντι: ὁ, τό, before ο gives ου, as Οὁδυσσεύς, Οὑλύμπιος, τοὔνομα: ὁ, τό, etc, before αυ gives ᾱυ, αὑτός, ταὐτό, ταὐτῷ (frequently written ἁτός, etc. in Inscrr. and Papyrus); so τὰ αὐτά=ταὐτά, αἱ αὐταί=αὑταί: ἡ before εὐ gives ηὑ, as ηὑλάβεια: τῇ before ἡ gives θη, as θἠμέρᾳ: τὸ before ὑ gives θου, as θοὔδωρ for τὸ ὕδωρ. D.b) other dialects: in their treatment of crasis these follow the local laws of contraction, hence, e.g, Doric dialect ὡξ from ὁ ἐξ [Refs 3rd c.BC+]; Ionic dialect ᾡσυμνήτης from ὁ αἰς-[Refs 5th c.BC+]; ὡυτή from ἡ αὐτή [Refs 1st c.AD+]
Strongs
Word:
ὁ
Transliteration:
ho
Pronounciation:
to
Language:
Greek
Definition:
the (sometimes to be supplied, at others omitted, in English idiom); the, this, that, one, he, she, it, etc; the definite article
blood
Strongs:
Greek:
αἷμα
Transliteration:
haima
Context:
Next word
Morphhology:
Noun Accusative Singular Neuter
Grammar:
a neuter PERSON OR THING that is having something done to them
Source:
Identical in all sources
Tyndale
Word:
αἷμα
Transliteration:
ahima
Gloss:
blood
Morphhology:
Greek Noun Neuter
Definition:
αἷμα, ατος, τό, [in LXX for דָּם;] blood. 1) In the ordinary sense: Mrk.5:25, Luk.8:43,44 22:44, Jhn.19:34, Act.15:20,29 21:25, Rev.8:7,8 11:6 16:3,4,6 19:13. 2) In special senses: (a) of generation, origin, kinship (cl.): Jhn.1:13 (see MM, VGT, see word); (b) as in OT (AR on Eph, l.with), in the phrase σάρξ καὶ αἷ. (αἷ. κ. σ.), to indicate human nature as opposite to God and created spirits: Mat.16:17, 1Co.15:50, Gal.1:16, Eph.6:12, Heb.2:14; (with) of things in colour resembling blood: Act.2:19,20, Rev.6:12 14:18-20. (d) of bloodshed, a bloody death (cl.): Mat.23:30,35 27:4,6,8,24,25, Luk.11:50,51 13:1, Act.1:19 5:28 18:6 20:26 22:20, Heb.12:4, Rev.6:10 17:6 18:24 19:2; αἷ. ἐκχέειν (Deiss, LAE, 428; MM, VGT, see word, αἷ.), Rom.3:15, Rev.16:6; (e) of sacrificial blood, as an expiation: Heb.9:7,12,13,18-22,25 10:4 11:28 13:11; of the blood of Christ, Mat.26:28, Mrk.14:24, Luk.22:20, Jhn.6:53,54,56, Act.20:28, Rom.3:25 5:9, 1Co.10:16 11:25,27, Eph.1:7 2:13, Col.1:20, Heb.9:12,14 10:19,29 12:24 13:20, 1Pe.1:2,19, 1Jn.1:7 (cf. 5:6,8), Rev.1:5 5:9 7:14 12:11. (Cremer, 69 f, 612 f.) (AS)
Liddell-Scott-Jones
Word:
αἷμα
Transliteration:
ahima
Gloss:
blood
Morphhology:
Greek Noun Neuter
Definition:
αἷμα, ατος, τό, blood, [Refs 8th c.BC+]: in plural, streams of blood, [Refs 5th c.BC+] 2) of anything like blood, Βακχίου[LXX+5th c.BC+] 2.b) dye obtained from ἄγχουσα, alkanet, [Refs] 3) with collateral meaning of spirit, courage, οὐκ ἔχων αἷμα pale, spiritless [Refs 4th c.BC+] II) bloodshcd, murder, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ὅμαιμον αἷ. a kinsman's murder, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; εἴργασται μητρῷον αἷ. [Refs 5th c.BC+]; αἶ. πράττειν[Refs 5th c.BC+]; αἷμα τραγοκτόνον shedding of goat's blood, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἐφ᾽ αἵματι φεύγειν to avoid trial for murder by going into exile, [Refs 5th c.BC+]: plural in this sense, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; αἵματασύγγονα brothers' corpses, [Refs 5th c.BC+] —concrete, νεακόνητον αἷ. keen-edged death, i. e. a sword, [Refs 5th c.BC+] III) blood relationship, kin, αἷ. τε καὶ γένος[Refs 8th c.BC+]; τὸ αἷ. τινος his blood or origin, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; αἷ. ἐμφύλιον incestuous kinship, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; μητρὸς τῆς ἐμῆς ἐν αἵματι akin to her by blood, [Refs 5th c.BC+] III.2) concrete, of a person, ὦ Διὸς. αἷμα[Refs]
Strongs > g129
Word:
αἷμα
Transliteration:
haîma
Pronounciation:
hah'-ee-mah
Language:
Greek
Definition:
blood, literally (of men or animals), figuratively (the juice of grapes) or specially (the atoning blood of Christ); by implication, bloodshed, also kindred; blood; of uncertain derivation
and
Strongs:
Lexicon:
καί
Greek:
καὶ
Transliteration:
kai
Context:
Next word
Morphhology:
Conjunction
Source:
Identical in all sources
Tyndale
Word:
καί
Transliteration:
kai
Gloss:
and
Morphhology:
Greek Conjunction
Definition:
καί, conj., and I. Copulative. 1) Connecting single words; (a) in general: Mat.2:18, 16:1, Mrk.2:15, Luk.8:15, Heb.1:1, al. mult; repeated before each of the terms in a series, Mat.23:23, Luk.14:21, Rom.7:12, 9:4, al. (b) connecting numerals (WM, §37, 4): Jhn.2:20, Act.13:20; (with) joining terms which are not mutually exclusive, as the part with the whole: Mat.8:33, 26:59, Mrk.16:17, Act.5:29, al. 2) Connecting clauses and sentences: Mat.3:12, Act.5:21, al. mult; esp. (a) where, after the simplicity of the popular language, sentences are paratactically joined (WM, §60, 3; M, Pr., 12; Deiss, LAE, 128ff.): Mat.1:21, 7:25, Mrk.9:5, Jhn.10:3, al; (b) joining affirmative to negative sentences: Luk.3:14, Jhn.4:11, IIIJhn.10; (with) consecutive, and so: Mat.5:1, 23:32, Heb.3:19, al; after imperatives, Mat.4:19, Luk.7:7, al; (d) = καίτοι, and yet: Mat.3:14, 6:26, Mrk.12:12, Luk.18:7 (Field, Notes, 72), 1Co.5:2, al; (e) beginning an apodosis (= Heb. וְ; so sometimes δέ in cl.), then: Luk.2:21, 7:12, Act.1:10; beginning a question (WM, §53, 3a): Mrk.10:26, Luk.10:29, Jhn.9:36. 3) Epexegetic, and, and indeed, namely (WM, §53, 3c): Luk.3:18, Jhn.1:16, Act.23:6, Rom.1:5, 1Co.3:5, al. 4) In transition: Mat.4:23, Mrk.5:1, 21, Jhn.1:19, al; so, Hebraistically, καὶ ἐγένετο (וַי:הִי; also ἐγένετο δέ), Mrk.1:9 (cf. Luk.5:1; V. Burton, §§357-60; M, Pr., 14, 16). 5) καὶ. καί, both. and (for τε. καί, see: τε); (a) connecting single words: Mat.10:28, Mrk.4:41, Rom.11:33, al; (b) clauses and sentences: Mrk.9:13, Jhn.7:28, 1Co.1:22, al. II. Adjunctive, also, even, still: Mat.5:39, 40; Mrk.2:28, al. mult; esp. with pron, adv, etc, Mat.20:4, Jhn.7:47, al; ὡς κ, Act.11:17; καθὼς κ, Rom.15:7; οὑτω κ, Rom.6:11; διὸ κ, Luk.1:35; ὁ κ. (Deiss, BS, 313ff.), Act.13:9; pleonastically, μετὰ κ. (Bl, §77, 7; Deiss, BS, 265f,), Php.4:3; τί κ, 1 Co 15:29; ἀλλὰ κ, Luk.14:22, Jhn.5:18, al; καίγε (M, Pr., 230; Burton, §437), Act.17:27; καίπερ, Heb.5:8; κ. ἐάν, see: ἐάν. ἐάν, contr. fr. εἰ ἄν, conditional particle, representing something as "under certain circumstances actual or liable to happen," but not so definitely expected as in the case of εἰ with ind. (Bl, §65, 4; cf. Jhn.13:17, 1Co.7:36), if haply, if; 1) with subjc. (cl.); (a) pres: Mat.6:22, Luk.10:6, Jhn.7:17, Rom.2:25, 26 al; { (b) aor. (= Lat. fut. pf.): Mat.4:9 16:26 (cf. ptcp. in Luk.9:25; M, Pr., 230), Mrk.3:24, Luk.14:34, Jhn.5:43, Rom.7:2, al; = cl. εἰ, with opt, Jhn.9:22 11:57, Act.9:2; as Heb. אִם = ὅταν, Jhn.12:32 14:3, I Jhn.2:28 3:2, Heb.3:7 " (LXX). 2) C. indic, (as in late writers, fr. Arist. on; see WH, App., 171; VD, MGr. 2, App., §77; Deiss, BS, 201f, LAE, 155, 254; M, Pr., 168, 187; Bl, §65, 4); (a) fut: Mat.18:19 T, Luk.19:40, Act.7:7; (b) pres: 1Th.3:8 (see Milligan, in l.). 3) With other particles: ἐ. καί (Bl, §65, 6), Gal.6:1; ἐ. μή (M, Pr., 185, 187; Bl, l.with), with subjc. pres, Mat.10:13, 1Co.8:8, Jas.2:17, 1Jn.3:21; aor, Mat.6:15, Mrk.3:27, Jhn.3:3, Rom.10:15, Gal.1:8 2:16 (see Lft, Ellic, in ll.); ἐ. τε. ἐ. τε, [in LXX for אִם. אִם, Est.19:13, al,] Rom.14:8. 4) = cl. ἄν (which see) after relat. pronouns and adverbs (Tdf, Pr., 96; WH, App., 173; M, Pr., 42f; Bl, §26, 4; Mayser, 152f; Deiss, BS, 202ff.): ὃς ἐ, Mat.5:19, Mrk.6:22, 23 Luk.17:32, 1Co.6:18, al; ὅπου ἐ, Mat.8:19; ὁσάκις ἐ, Rev.11:6; οὗ ἐ, 1Co.16:6; καθὸ ἐ, 2Co.8:12; ὅστις ἐ, Gal.5:10. (AS)
Liddell-Scott-Jones
Word:
καί
Transliteration:
kai
Gloss:
and
Morphhology:
Greek Conjunction
Definition:
καί, conjunction, copulative, joining words and sentences, A) and; also adverb, even, also, just, frequently expressing emphatic assertion or assent, corresponding as positive to the negative οὐ (μή) or οὐδέ (μηδέ). copulative, and, A.I) joining words or sentences to those preceding, ἦ, καὶ κυανέῃσιν ἐπ᾽ ὀφρύσινεῦσε Κρονίων [Refs 8th c.BC+]: repeated with two or more Nouns, αἱ δὲ ἔλαφοι κ. δορκάδες κ. οἱ ἄγριοι οἶες κ. οἱ ὄνοι οἱ ἄγριοι [Refs 5th c.BC+]; joining only the last pair, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; ὁ ὄχλος πλείων κ. πλείων ἐπέρρει more and more, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; to add epithets after πολύς, πολλὰ κ. ἐσθλά [Refs 8th c.BC+] A.I.2) to addalimiting or defining expression, πρὸς μακρὸν ὄρος κ. Κύνθιον ὄχθον to the mountain and specially to, [Refs 5th c.BC+] (sometimes in reverse order, πρὸς δῶμα Διὸς κ. μακρὸν Ὄλυμπον [Refs 8th c.BC+]; to add by way of climax, θεῶν. κ. Ποσειδῶνος all the gods, and above all. , [Refs 5th c.BC+]; frequently ἄλλοι τε καί, ἄλλως τε καί, see at {ἄλλος} [Refs]; ὀλίγου τινὸς ἄξια κ. οὐδενός little or nothing, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; κ. ταῦτα and this too. , γελᾶν ἀναπείθειν, κ. ταῦθ᾽ οὕτω πολέμιον ὄντα τῷ γέλωτι [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.II) at the beginning of a sentence, A.II.1) in appeals or requests, καί μοι δὸς τὴν Χεῖρα [Refs 8th c.BC+]; καί μοι λέγε, καί μοι ἀπόκριναι, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; frequently in Oratt, καί μοι λέγε. τὸ ψήφισμα, καί μοι ἀνάγνωθι, [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.II.2) in questions, to introduce an objection or express surprise, κ. τίς τόδ᾽ ἐξίκοιτ᾽ ἂν ἀγγέλων τάχο; [Refs 4th c.BC+]; κ. πῶς; pray how? [Refs 5th c.BC+]; κ. δὴ τί; but then what? [Refs]; κ. ποῖον; [Refs 5th c.BC+]; κ. τίς εἶδε πώποτε βοῦς κριβανίτα; [Refs 5th c.BC+]; κἄπειτ᾽ ἔκανε; [Refs 5th c.BC+]; κ. τίς πώποτε Χαριζόμενος ἑτέρῳ τοῦτο εἰργάσατ; [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.II.3) ={καίτοι}, and yet, [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.II.4) at the beginning of a speech, [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.III) after words implying sameness or like ness, as, γνώμῃσι ἐχρέωντο ὁμοίῃσι κ. σύ they had the same opinion as you, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἴσον or ἴσα κ, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἐν ἴσῳ (i.e. ἐστὶ) κ. εἰ. [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.III.2) after words implying comparison or opposition, αἱ δαπάναι οὐχ ὁμοίως κ. πρίν [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.III.3) to express simultaneity, ἦν ἦμαρ δεύτερον, κἀγὼ κατηγόμην [Refs 5th c.BC+]; παρέρχονταί τε μέσαι νύκτες κ. ψύχεται [τὸ ὕδωρ] [Refs 5th c.BC+]; [οἱ Λακεδαιμόνιοι] οὐκ ἔφθασαν τὴν ἀρχὴν κατασχόντες κ. Θηβαίοις εὐθὺς ἐπεβούλευσαν [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.IV) joining an affirmative clause with a negative, ἀλλ᾽ ὥς τι δράσων εἷρπε κοὐ θανούμενος [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.V) καί, καί. correlative, not only, but also. , κ. ἀεὶ κ. νῦν, κ. τότε κ. νῦν, [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.VI) by anacoluthon, ὣς φαμένη κ. κερδοσύνῃ ἡγήσατ᾽ Ἀθήνη, for ὣς ἔφη κ, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ἔρχεται δὲ αὐτή τε. κ. τὸν υἱὸν ἔχουσα, for κ. ὁ υἱός, [Refs 5th c.BC+] B) even, also, just, B.1) τάχα κεν κ. ἀναίτιον αἰτιόῳτο even the innocent, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; δόμεναι κ. μεῖζον ἄεθλον an even greater prize, [Refs]full five,[Refs 5th c.BC+] two or three, [Refs 5th c.BC+] B.2) also, κ. ἐγώ I also, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; κ. αὐτοί they also, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; Ἀγίας καὶ Σωκράτης κ. τούτω ἀπεθανέτην likewise died, [Refs]; in adding surnames, etc, Ὦχος ὁ κ. Δαρειαῖος [Refs 5th c.BC+]; nominative ὁ κ. first in [Refs 1st c.BC+], frequently later, [Refs 2nd c.AD+], etc; Ἰούδας ὁ κ. Μακκαβαῖος [NT+8th c.BC+]; εἴπερ τι κ. ἄλλο, ὥς τις κ. ἄλλος, [Refs 5th c.BC+], not only, but also. , see at {μόνος}; οὐδὲν μᾶλλον. ἢ οὐ καὶ. [Refs 5th c.BC+] B.2.b) frequently used both in the antecedent and relative clause, where we put also in the antecedent only, εἰ μὲν κ. σὺ εἶ τῶν ἀνθρώπων ὧνπερ κ. ἐγώ [Refs 8th c.BC+] B.3) frequently in apodosi, after temporal Conjs, ἀλλ᾽ ὅτε δή ῥα, κ. τότε δή. [Refs 8th c.BC+]; also after εἰ, [Refs 8th c.BC+]: as a Hebraism, κ. ἐγένετο. κ. [LXX+NT] B.4) with Advs, to give emphasis, κ. κάρτα [Refs 5th c.BC+]; κ. λίην full surely, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; κ. πάλαι, κ. πάνυ, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; κ. μάλα, κ. σφόδρα, in answers, [Refs 5th c.BC+] B.5) with words expressing a minimum, even so much as, were it but, just, ἱέμενος κ. καπνὸν ἀποθρῴσκοντα νοῆσαι [Refs 8th c.BC+]; οἷς ἡδὺ κ. λέγειν [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τίς δὲ κ. προσβλέψετα; who will so much as look at you? [Refs 5th c.BC+] B.6) just, τοῦτ᾽ αὐτὸ κ. νοσοῦμεν 'tis just that that ails me, [Refs 5th c.BC+]: frequently with a relative, τὸ κ. κλαίουσα τέτηκα [Refs 8th c.BC+]; and how long ago was the city sacked? [Refs 4th c.BC+]; ποῦ καί σφε θάπτε; where is he burying her? [Refs 5th c.BC+] B.7) even, just, implying assent, ἔπειτά με κ. λίποι αἰών thereafter let life e'en leave me, [Refs 8th c.BC+] B.8) κ. εἰ even if, of a whole condition represented as an extreme case, opposed to εἰ κ. although, notwithstanding that, of a condition represented as immaterial even if fulfilled,[Refs 8th c.BC+]; εἰ κ. ἠπιστάμην if I had been able, [Refs 5th c.BC+] each exert their force separtely, as εἴ περ ἀδειής τ᾽ ἐστί, καὶ εἰ. and if. [Refs 8th c.BC+] B.9) before a Participle, to represent either καὶ εἰ, or εἰ καί, although, albeit, Ἕκτορα κ. μεμαῶτα μάχης σχήσεσθαι ὀΐω, for ἢν κ. μεμάῃ, how much soever he rage, although he rage, [Refs 8th c.BC+] C) Position: καί and, is by Poets sometimes put after another word, ἔγνωκα, τοῖσδε κοὐδὲν ἀντειπεῖν ἔχω, for καὶ τοῖσδε οὐδέν [Refs 4th c.BC+] C.2) καί also, sometimes goes between a preposition and its case, ἐν κ. θαλάσσᾳ [Refs 5th c.BC+] C.3) very seldom at the end of a verse, [Refs 5th c.BC+] D) crasis: with ᾰ, as κἄν, κἀγαθοί, etc; with ε, as κἀγώ, κἄπειτα, etc, Doric dialect κἠγώ, κἤπειτα, etc; with η, as Χἠ, Χἠμέρη, Χἠμεῖς, etc; with ῐ in Χἰκετεύετε, Χἰλαρ; with ο, as Χὠ, Χὤστις, etc; with υ in Χὐμεῖς, Χὐποχείριον, etc; with ω in the pronoun ᾧ, Χ; with αι, as κᾀσχρῶ; with αυ, as καὐτό; with ει, as κεἰ, κεἰς (but also κἀς), κᾆτ; with εὐ, as κεὐγένεια, κεὐσταλή; with οι in Χοἰ (Χᾠ [Refs]; with ου in Χοὖτος, κοὐ, κοὐδέ, and the like.
Strongs
Word:
καί
Transliteration:
kaí
Pronounciation:
kahee
Language:
Greek
Morphhology:
Conjunction
Definition:
and, also, even, so then, too, etc.; often used in connection (or composition) with other particles or small words; and, also, both, but, even, for, if, or, so, that, then, therefore, when, yet; apparently, a primary particle, having a copulative and sometimes also a cumulative force
what is strangled
Strongs:
Lexicon:
πνικτός
Greek:
πνικτὸν
Transliteration:
pnikton
Context:
Next word
Gloss:
strangled
Morphhology:
Adjective Accusative Singular Neuter
Grammar:
DESCRIBING a neuter person or thing that is having something done to them
Source:
Identical in all sources
Tyndale
Word:
πνικτός
Transliteration:
pniktos
Gloss:
strangled
Morphhology:
Greek Adjective
Definition:
πνικτός, -ή, -όν (πνίγω), strangled : Act.15:20, 29 21:25 (cf. Lev.17:13-14). (AS)
Liddell-Scott-Jones
Word:
πνικτός
Transliteration:
pniktos
Gloss:
strangled
Morphhology:
Greek Adjective
Definition:
πνικ-τός, ή, όν, strangled, [NT] 2) air-tight, [Refs 2nd c.BC+] adverb -τῶς[Refs] II) baked or stewed [Refs 5th c.BC+]
Strongs
Word:
πνικτός
Transliteration:
pniktós
Pronounciation:
pnik-tos'
Language:
Greek
Morphhology:
Adjective
Definition:
throttled, i.e. (neuter concretely) an animal choked to death (not bled); strangled; from g4155 (πνίγω)
and
Strongs:
Lexicon:
καί
Greek:
καὶ
Transliteration:
kai
Context:
Next word
Morphhology:
Conjunction
Source:
Identical in all sources
Tyndale
Word:
καί
Transliteration:
kai
Gloss:
and
Morphhology:
Greek Conjunction
Definition:
καί, conj., and I. Copulative. 1) Connecting single words; (a) in general: Mat.2:18, 16:1, Mrk.2:15, Luk.8:15, Heb.1:1, al. mult; repeated before each of the terms in a series, Mat.23:23, Luk.14:21, Rom.7:12, 9:4, al. (b) connecting numerals (WM, §37, 4): Jhn.2:20, Act.13:20; (with) joining terms which are not mutually exclusive, as the part with the whole: Mat.8:33, 26:59, Mrk.16:17, Act.5:29, al. 2) Connecting clauses and sentences: Mat.3:12, Act.5:21, al. mult; esp. (a) where, after the simplicity of the popular language, sentences are paratactically joined (WM, §60, 3; M, Pr., 12; Deiss, LAE, 128ff.): Mat.1:21, 7:25, Mrk.9:5, Jhn.10:3, al; (b) joining affirmative to negative sentences: Luk.3:14, Jhn.4:11, IIIJhn.10; (with) consecutive, and so: Mat.5:1, 23:32, Heb.3:19, al; after imperatives, Mat.4:19, Luk.7:7, al; (d) = καίτοι, and yet: Mat.3:14, 6:26, Mrk.12:12, Luk.18:7 (Field, Notes, 72), 1Co.5:2, al; (e) beginning an apodosis (= Heb. וְ; so sometimes δέ in cl.), then: Luk.2:21, 7:12, Act.1:10; beginning a question (WM, §53, 3a): Mrk.10:26, Luk.10:29, Jhn.9:36. 3) Epexegetic, and, and indeed, namely (WM, §53, 3c): Luk.3:18, Jhn.1:16, Act.23:6, Rom.1:5, 1Co.3:5, al. 4) In transition: Mat.4:23, Mrk.5:1, 21, Jhn.1:19, al; so, Hebraistically, καὶ ἐγένετο (וַי:הִי; also ἐγένετο δέ), Mrk.1:9 (cf. Luk.5:1; V. Burton, §§357-60; M, Pr., 14, 16). 5) καὶ. καί, both. and (for τε. καί, see: τε); (a) connecting single words: Mat.10:28, Mrk.4:41, Rom.11:33, al; (b) clauses and sentences: Mrk.9:13, Jhn.7:28, 1Co.1:22, al. II. Adjunctive, also, even, still: Mat.5:39, 40; Mrk.2:28, al. mult; esp. with pron, adv, etc, Mat.20:4, Jhn.7:47, al; ὡς κ, Act.11:17; καθὼς κ, Rom.15:7; οὑτω κ, Rom.6:11; διὸ κ, Luk.1:35; ὁ κ. (Deiss, BS, 313ff.), Act.13:9; pleonastically, μετὰ κ. (Bl, §77, 7; Deiss, BS, 265f,), Php.4:3; τί κ, 1 Co 15:29; ἀλλὰ κ, Luk.14:22, Jhn.5:18, al; καίγε (M, Pr., 230; Burton, §437), Act.17:27; καίπερ, Heb.5:8; κ. ἐάν, see: ἐάν. ἐάν, contr. fr. εἰ ἄν, conditional particle, representing something as "under certain circumstances actual or liable to happen," but not so definitely expected as in the case of εἰ with ind. (Bl, §65, 4; cf. Jhn.13:17, 1Co.7:36), if haply, if; 1) with subjc. (cl.); (a) pres: Mat.6:22, Luk.10:6, Jhn.7:17, Rom.2:25, 26 al; { (b) aor. (= Lat. fut. pf.): Mat.4:9 16:26 (cf. ptcp. in Luk.9:25; M, Pr., 230), Mrk.3:24, Luk.14:34, Jhn.5:43, Rom.7:2, al; = cl. εἰ, with opt, Jhn.9:22 11:57, Act.9:2; as Heb. אִם = ὅταν, Jhn.12:32 14:3, I Jhn.2:28 3:2, Heb.3:7 " (LXX). 2) C. indic, (as in late writers, fr. Arist. on; see WH, App., 171; VD, MGr. 2, App., §77; Deiss, BS, 201f, LAE, 155, 254; M, Pr., 168, 187; Bl, §65, 4); (a) fut: Mat.18:19 T, Luk.19:40, Act.7:7; (b) pres: 1Th.3:8 (see Milligan, in l.). 3) With other particles: ἐ. καί (Bl, §65, 6), Gal.6:1; ἐ. μή (M, Pr., 185, 187; Bl, l.with), with subjc. pres, Mat.10:13, 1Co.8:8, Jas.2:17, 1Jn.3:21; aor, Mat.6:15, Mrk.3:27, Jhn.3:3, Rom.10:15, Gal.1:8 2:16 (see Lft, Ellic, in ll.); ἐ. τε. ἐ. τε, [in LXX for אִם. אִם, Est.19:13, al,] Rom.14:8. 4) = cl. ἄν (which see) after relat. pronouns and adverbs (Tdf, Pr., 96; WH, App., 173; M, Pr., 42f; Bl, §26, 4; Mayser, 152f; Deiss, BS, 202ff.): ὃς ἐ, Mat.5:19, Mrk.6:22, 23 Luk.17:32, 1Co.6:18, al; ὅπου ἐ, Mat.8:19; ὁσάκις ἐ, Rev.11:6; οὗ ἐ, 1Co.16:6; καθὸ ἐ, 2Co.8:12; ὅστις ἐ, Gal.5:10. (AS)
Liddell-Scott-Jones
Word:
καί
Transliteration:
kai
Gloss:
and
Morphhology:
Greek Conjunction
Definition:
καί, conjunction, copulative, joining words and sentences, A) and; also adverb, even, also, just, frequently expressing emphatic assertion or assent, corresponding as positive to the negative οὐ (μή) or οὐδέ (μηδέ). copulative, and, A.I) joining words or sentences to those preceding, ἦ, καὶ κυανέῃσιν ἐπ᾽ ὀφρύσινεῦσε Κρονίων [Refs 8th c.BC+]: repeated with two or more Nouns, αἱ δὲ ἔλαφοι κ. δορκάδες κ. οἱ ἄγριοι οἶες κ. οἱ ὄνοι οἱ ἄγριοι [Refs 5th c.BC+]; joining only the last pair, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; ὁ ὄχλος πλείων κ. πλείων ἐπέρρει more and more, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; to add epithets after πολύς, πολλὰ κ. ἐσθλά [Refs 8th c.BC+] A.I.2) to addalimiting or defining expression, πρὸς μακρὸν ὄρος κ. Κύνθιον ὄχθον to the mountain and specially to, [Refs 5th c.BC+] (sometimes in reverse order, πρὸς δῶμα Διὸς κ. μακρὸν Ὄλυμπον [Refs 8th c.BC+]; to add by way of climax, θεῶν. κ. Ποσειδῶνος all the gods, and above all. , [Refs 5th c.BC+]; frequently ἄλλοι τε καί, ἄλλως τε καί, see at {ἄλλος} [Refs]; ὀλίγου τινὸς ἄξια κ. οὐδενός little or nothing, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; κ. ταῦτα and this too. , γελᾶν ἀναπείθειν, κ. ταῦθ᾽ οὕτω πολέμιον ὄντα τῷ γέλωτι [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.II) at the beginning of a sentence, A.II.1) in appeals or requests, καί μοι δὸς τὴν Χεῖρα [Refs 8th c.BC+]; καί μοι λέγε, καί μοι ἀπόκριναι, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; frequently in Oratt, καί μοι λέγε. τὸ ψήφισμα, καί μοι ἀνάγνωθι, [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.II.2) in questions, to introduce an objection or express surprise, κ. τίς τόδ᾽ ἐξίκοιτ᾽ ἂν ἀγγέλων τάχο; [Refs 4th c.BC+]; κ. πῶς; pray how? [Refs 5th c.BC+]; κ. δὴ τί; but then what? [Refs]; κ. ποῖον; [Refs 5th c.BC+]; κ. τίς εἶδε πώποτε βοῦς κριβανίτα; [Refs 5th c.BC+]; κἄπειτ᾽ ἔκανε; [Refs 5th c.BC+]; κ. τίς πώποτε Χαριζόμενος ἑτέρῳ τοῦτο εἰργάσατ; [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.II.3) ={καίτοι}, and yet, [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.II.4) at the beginning of a speech, [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.III) after words implying sameness or like ness, as, γνώμῃσι ἐχρέωντο ὁμοίῃσι κ. σύ they had the same opinion as you, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἴσον or ἴσα κ, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἐν ἴσῳ (i.e. ἐστὶ) κ. εἰ. [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.III.2) after words implying comparison or opposition, αἱ δαπάναι οὐχ ὁμοίως κ. πρίν [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.III.3) to express simultaneity, ἦν ἦμαρ δεύτερον, κἀγὼ κατηγόμην [Refs 5th c.BC+]; παρέρχονταί τε μέσαι νύκτες κ. ψύχεται [τὸ ὕδωρ] [Refs 5th c.BC+]; [οἱ Λακεδαιμόνιοι] οὐκ ἔφθασαν τὴν ἀρχὴν κατασχόντες κ. Θηβαίοις εὐθὺς ἐπεβούλευσαν [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.IV) joining an affirmative clause with a negative, ἀλλ᾽ ὥς τι δράσων εἷρπε κοὐ θανούμενος [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.V) καί, καί. correlative, not only, but also. , κ. ἀεὶ κ. νῦν, κ. τότε κ. νῦν, [Refs 5th c.BC+] A.VI) by anacoluthon, ὣς φαμένη κ. κερδοσύνῃ ἡγήσατ᾽ Ἀθήνη, for ὣς ἔφη κ, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ἔρχεται δὲ αὐτή τε. κ. τὸν υἱὸν ἔχουσα, for κ. ὁ υἱός, [Refs 5th c.BC+] B) even, also, just, B.1) τάχα κεν κ. ἀναίτιον αἰτιόῳτο even the innocent, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; δόμεναι κ. μεῖζον ἄεθλον an even greater prize, [Refs]full five,[Refs 5th c.BC+] two or three, [Refs 5th c.BC+] B.2) also, κ. ἐγώ I also, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; κ. αὐτοί they also, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; Ἀγίας καὶ Σωκράτης κ. τούτω ἀπεθανέτην likewise died, [Refs]; in adding surnames, etc, Ὦχος ὁ κ. Δαρειαῖος [Refs 5th c.BC+]; nominative ὁ κ. first in [Refs 1st c.BC+], frequently later, [Refs 2nd c.AD+], etc; Ἰούδας ὁ κ. Μακκαβαῖος [NT+8th c.BC+]; εἴπερ τι κ. ἄλλο, ὥς τις κ. ἄλλος, [Refs 5th c.BC+], not only, but also. , see at {μόνος}; οὐδὲν μᾶλλον. ἢ οὐ καὶ. [Refs 5th c.BC+] B.2.b) frequently used both in the antecedent and relative clause, where we put also in the antecedent only, εἰ μὲν κ. σὺ εἶ τῶν ἀνθρώπων ὧνπερ κ. ἐγώ [Refs 8th c.BC+] B.3) frequently in apodosi, after temporal Conjs, ἀλλ᾽ ὅτε δή ῥα, κ. τότε δή. [Refs 8th c.BC+]; also after εἰ, [Refs 8th c.BC+]: as a Hebraism, κ. ἐγένετο. κ. [LXX+NT] B.4) with Advs, to give emphasis, κ. κάρτα [Refs 5th c.BC+]; κ. λίην full surely, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; κ. πάλαι, κ. πάνυ, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; κ. μάλα, κ. σφόδρα, in answers, [Refs 5th c.BC+] B.5) with words expressing a minimum, even so much as, were it but, just, ἱέμενος κ. καπνὸν ἀποθρῴσκοντα νοῆσαι [Refs 8th c.BC+]; οἷς ἡδὺ κ. λέγειν [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τίς δὲ κ. προσβλέψετα; who will so much as look at you? [Refs 5th c.BC+] B.6) just, τοῦτ᾽ αὐτὸ κ. νοσοῦμεν 'tis just that that ails me, [Refs 5th c.BC+]: frequently with a relative, τὸ κ. κλαίουσα τέτηκα [Refs 8th c.BC+]; and how long ago was the city sacked? [Refs 4th c.BC+]; ποῦ καί σφε θάπτε; where is he burying her? [Refs 5th c.BC+] B.7) even, just, implying assent, ἔπειτά με κ. λίποι αἰών thereafter let life e'en leave me, [Refs 8th c.BC+] B.8) κ. εἰ even if, of a whole condition represented as an extreme case, opposed to εἰ κ. although, notwithstanding that, of a condition represented as immaterial even if fulfilled,[Refs 8th c.BC+]; εἰ κ. ἠπιστάμην if I had been able, [Refs 5th c.BC+] each exert their force separtely, as εἴ περ ἀδειής τ᾽ ἐστί, καὶ εἰ. and if. [Refs 8th c.BC+] B.9) before a Participle, to represent either καὶ εἰ, or εἰ καί, although, albeit, Ἕκτορα κ. μεμαῶτα μάχης σχήσεσθαι ὀΐω, for ἢν κ. μεμάῃ, how much soever he rage, although he rage, [Refs 8th c.BC+] C) Position: καί and, is by Poets sometimes put after another word, ἔγνωκα, τοῖσδε κοὐδὲν ἀντειπεῖν ἔχω, for καὶ τοῖσδε οὐδέν [Refs 4th c.BC+] C.2) καί also, sometimes goes between a preposition and its case, ἐν κ. θαλάσσᾳ [Refs 5th c.BC+] C.3) very seldom at the end of a verse, [Refs 5th c.BC+] D) crasis: with ᾰ, as κἄν, κἀγαθοί, etc; with ε, as κἀγώ, κἄπειτα, etc, Doric dialect κἠγώ, κἤπειτα, etc; with η, as Χἠ, Χἠμέρη, Χἠμεῖς, etc; with ῐ in Χἰκετεύετε, Χἰλαρ; with ο, as Χὠ, Χὤστις, etc; with υ in Χὐμεῖς, Χὐποχείριον, etc; with ω in the pronoun ᾧ, Χ; with αι, as κᾀσχρῶ; with αυ, as καὐτό; with ει, as κεἰ, κεἰς (but also κἀς), κᾆτ; with εὐ, as κεὐγένεια, κεὐσταλή; with οι in Χοἰ (Χᾠ [Refs]; with ου in Χοὖτος, κοὐ, κοὐδέ, and the like.
Strongs
Word:
καί
Transliteration:
kaí
Pronounciation:
kahee
Language:
Greek
Morphhology:
Conjunction
Definition:
and, also, even, so then, too, etc.; often used in connection (or composition) with other particles or small words; and, also, both, but, even, for, if, or, so, that, then, therefore, when, yet; apparently, a primary particle, having a copulative and sometimes also a cumulative force
sexual immorality.
Strongs:
Lexicon:
πορνεία
Greek:
πορνείαν.
Transliteration:
porneian
Context:
Next word
Gloss:
sexual sin
Morphhology:
Noun Accusative Singular Feminine
Grammar:
a female PERSON OR THING that is having something done to them
Source:
Identical in all sources
Tyndale
Word:
πορνεία
Transliteration:
porneia
Gloss:
sexual sin
Morphhology:
Greek Noun Female
Definition:
πορνεία, -ας, ἡ (πορνεύω), [in LXX for תַּזְנוּת and cogn. forms;] fornication: Act.15:20, 29 21:25, 1Co.5:1 6:13 6:18, 2Co.12:21, Gal.5:19, Eph.5:3, Col.3:5, 1Th.4:3 (Lft, Notes, 53), Rev.9:21; pl. (see WM, 220; Bl, § 32, 6), 1Co.7:2; disting. from μοιχεία, Mat.15:19, Mrk.7:21; = μοιχεία (Amos 8:17 Sir.23:23, al.), Mat.5:32 19:9. Metaphorical (of idolatry: Deu.23:2, Hos.1:2): Jhn.8:41 (Westc, in l), and so perh. (Thayer-Grimm, see word; but see Swete, in 11.), Rev.2:21 14:18 17:2, 4 18:3 19:2. (AS)
Liddell-Scott-Jones
Word:
πορνεία
Transliteration:
porneia
Gloss:
sexual sin
Morphhology:
Greek Noun Female
Definition:
πορν-εία, Ionic dialect πορν-είη, ἡ, prostitution, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; of a man, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; fornication, unchastity, [NT] II) metaphorically, idolatry, [LXX]
Strongs
Word:
πορνεία
Transliteration:
porneía
Pronounciation:
por-ni'-ah
Language:
Greek
Morphhology:
Noun Feminine
Definition:
harlotry (including adultery and incest); figuratively, idolatry; fornication; from g4203 (πορνεύω)
